API-Pt-I, Vol-9

THE
AYURVEDIC
PHARMACOPOEIA
OF
INDIA
PART - I
VOLUME - IX
First Edition
Government of India
Ministry of AYUSH
2016
Published by
PHARMACOPOEIA COMMISSION FOR INDIAN MEDICINE &

HOMOEOPATHY
GHAZIABAD
THE
AYURVEDIC
PHARMACOPOEIA
OF
INDIA
PART - I
VOLUME - IX
First Edition
Government of India
Ministry of AYUSH
2016
Published by
PHARMACOPOEIA COMMISSION FOR INDIAN MEDICINE & HOMOEOPATHY

GHAZIABAD
PDH.81.Pt.I.Vol.IX
2000-2015-(DSK-II)
2016, Pharmacopoeia Commission for Indian Medicine & Homoeopathy
Ministry of AYUSH, Government of India
On behalf of
Government of India
Ministry of AYUSH,
AYUSH Bhawan, B Block,
GPO Complex, INA, New Delhi - 110 023
Published by
Pharmacopoeia Commission for Indian Medicine & Homoeopathy

PLIM Campus, Kamla Nehru Nagar,
Ghaziabad-201002 (U.P.) India
ii
iv
vi
LEGAL NOTICES
In India, there are several laws dealing with drugs for which monographs with quality standards and
certain other requirements are prescribed. These monographs should be interpreted subject to the restrictions
imposed by these laws wherever they are applicable.
In general, the Drugs and Cosmetic Act, 1940; the Dangerous Drugs Act, 1930; the Poisons Act, 1919;
Drugs and Magic Remedies (Objectionable Advertisement) Act, 1954; the Narcotic Drugs and Psychotropic
Substances Act 1985 and the Biodiversity Act, 2002; all as amended from time to time, along with the Rules
framed thereunder, should be consulted to ensure that the provisions of such laws are being complied with.
Under the Drugs and Cosmetics Act, the Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India, represented by its Parts
and Volumes is the book of standards for substances included therein and such standards are official. If
considered necessary these standards can be amended and the Pharmacopoeia Commission for Indian Medicine
& Homoeopathy is authorized to issue such amendments. Whenever such amendments are issued, the specific
Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India intended thereby would be deemed to have been amended accordingly.
vii
GENERAL NOTICES
Title: The title of the book is Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India, Part-I, Volume-IX. Wherever the abbreviation
API, Pt.-I, Vol.-IX is used, it stands for the same and for the Supplements or Amendments thereto.
Name of the Monograph: The name given on top of each monograph is in Saskta as mentioned in the
Ayurvedic classics and/or Ayurvedic Formulary of India (AFI) and will be considered Official. These names
have been arranged in alphabetical order in English.
If a preparation is intended to be stored over a period of time, deterioration due to microbial contamination may
be inhibited by the addition of a permitted preservative. In such circumstances the label should state the name
and the concentration of the preservative and the appropriate storage conditions. Mere presence of a monograph
in the Pharmacopoeia shall not qualify the ingredient as a drug. The primary purpose of the monographs is to
specify the quality parameters that can be employed to assess the fitness for use for the desired purpose
which could be as a drug, dietary supplement, cosmetic or a functional food. The ingredients mentioned in this
Pharmacopoeia may be prepared and their quality assessed as per the methods mentioned in the respective
monographs. These ingredients may be regarded as Pharmacopoeial grade, even if they are to be used for nontherapeutic purposes.
Introductory para: Each monograph begins with a Definition in an introductory paragraph. For drugs of plant
origin, the part used has also been specified.
The requirements given in the monographs are not framed to provide against all impurities, contaminants or
adulterants; they provide appropriate limits only for possible impurities that may be permitted to a certain
extent. Material found to contain an impurity, contaminant or adulterant which is not detected by means of the
prescribed tests in the Appendix 2 are also to be considered as impurity, should rational consideration require
its absence.
Hydro-alcohol: 50 per cent v/v of ethanol in purified water
Yield of Extract: The yield of extract mentioned in the monographs is meant to be indicative only. This is so,
as newer techniques for extraction are being developed having higher efficiencies. Further, extractive values
and thus yields are known to exhibit a high degree of inherent variability due to seasonal, geographical, edaphic
and ontogenic factors.
Standards: For statutory purposes, the following shall be considered Official Standards: Definition,
Identification, Quantitative parameters, Assay and Other requirements.
Added Substances: An article for which a monograph has been recommended contains no added
substances/excipients, except when specifically permitted in the individual monograph. Unless otherwise
specified in the individual monograph, or elsewhere in the General Notices, such added substances/excipients
shall be from the approved list of Drugs and Cosmetics Rules, under Rule 169 to enhance its stability,
usefulness, elegance, or to facilitate its preparation. Such added substances shall comply with the quality
indicated for it, shall be harmless in the amounts used, shall not exceed the minimum quantity required to
provide their intended effect, shall not impair the therapeutic efficacy or the bioavailability and safety of the
preparation and shall not interfere with the tests and assays prescribed for determining compliance with the
official standards. Particular care should be taken to ensure that such substances are free from harmful
viii
organisms. Though the manufacturer of an extract is given the freedom to use an added substance, the
manufacturer must guarantee the innocuousness of the added substance. The manufacturer shall also be
responsible to explain to the appropriate authority, if needed, regarding the purpose of the added substance(s).
Meanings of Terms
Alcohol: The term alcohol without qualification means ethanol (95 per cent). Other dilutions of ethanol are
indicated by the term alcohol followed by a statement of the percentage by volume of ethanol
(C2H6O/C2H5OH) required.
Desiccator: A tightly closed container of suitable size and design that maintains an atmosphere of low moisture
content by means of silica gel or phosphorus pentoxide or other suitable desiccant
Drying and Ignition to Constant Weight: Two consecutive weighings after the drying or igniting operations
do not differ by more than 0.5 mg, per g of the drug taken the second weighing, following an additional period
of drying or of ignition, respectively appropriate to the nature and quantity of the residue.
Ethanol: The term ethanol without qualification means anhydrous ethanol or absolute alcohol.
Filtration: Unless otherwise stated, filtration is the passing of a liquid through a suitable filter paper or
equivalent device until the filtrate is clear.
Freshly prepared: Made not more than 24 hours before use
Label: Any printed packing material, including package inserts that provide information on the article
Negligible: A quantity not exceeding 0.50 mg
Solution: Where the name of the solvent is not stated solution implies a solution in water. The water used
complies with the requirements of the monographs on Purified Water.
Temperature: The symbol 0 used without qualification indicates the use of the Celsius thermometric scale.
Water: If the term is used without qualification means Purified Water of the Pharmacopoeia. The term
distilled water indicates Purified Water prepared by distillation.
Water-bath: A bath containing boiling water unless water at another temperature is indicated. Other methods of
heating may be used provided the required temperature is approximately maintained but not exceeded.
Capital Letters in the Text: The names of the Pharmacopoeial substances, preparations and other materials
in the text are printed in capital initial letters, and these infer that materials of Pharmacopoeial quality have
been used.
Italics: Italic types are used for Scientific names of the plant drugs and microorganisms, and for some subheadings and certain notations of the chemical names. Italic types have also been used for words which refer
to solvent system in TLC procedure, reagents and substances, processes covered under Appendices. Chemicals
and Reagents, and Substances of Processes in Appendices have also been printed in italics.
Odour and Taste: Wherever a specific odour has been observed, it has been mentioned as characteristic for
that substance, but the description as odourless or no odour has generally been avoided in the Description
where a substance has no odour. Where an odour is said to be present, it is examined by smelling the drug
directly after opening the container. If an odour is discernible, the contents are rapidly transferred to an open
ix
vessel and re-examined after 15 minutes. If odour persists to be discernible, the sample complies with the
description for odour, as a characteristic for that substance.
The taste of a drug is examined by taking a small quantity of drug by the tip of a moist glass rod and allowing it to
remain on the tongue. This does not apply in the case of poisonous substances.
Powder: Drug substances are subjected to comminution during preparation. It is desirable that such powders
maintain certain average particle size for effective processing.
To provide for such situations, the fineness of a powder is given in terms of sieve sizes, using the BIS sieves as
standard. The sieve sizes follow the latest revision of the BIS. For the convenience of users, the equivalents or nearest
equivalent numbers according to the earlier BIS have also been given.
Weights and Measures: The metric system of weights and measures is employed. Weights are given in multiples
or fractions of a gram (g) or of a milligram (mg). Fluid measures are given in multiples of fraction of milliliter (ml).
The amount stated is approximate but the quantity actually used must be accurately weighed and must not deviate
by more than 10 per cent from the one stated.
When the term drop is used, measurement is to be made by means of a tube which delivers 20 drops per gram
of distilled water at 150.
Identity, Purity and Strength: Under the heading Identification, tests are provided as an aid to
identification and are described in the respective monographs and included.
Herbal/Plant drugs should be duly identified and authenticated and should be free from insects, pests, fungi,
microorganisms, pesticides, and other animal matter including animal excreta, should be within the permitted
and specified limits for lead, arsenic and heavy metals, and show no abnormal odour, colour, sliminess, mould
or any sign of deterioration.
Herbal/plant drugs should be duly identified and authenticated and should be free from insects, pests and other
animal matter including animal excreta, should have, within the permitted and specified limits, for fungi,
microorganisms, pesticides, and heavy metals, and show no abnormal odour, colour, sliminess, mould or any
sign of deterioration.
Quantitative tests like total ash, acid-insoluble ash, water-soluble ash, alcohol-soluble extractive, water-soluble
extractive, moisture content, volatile oil content and assays are the parameters upon which the standards of
Pharmacopoeia depend. Except for Assays, which are covered under each monograph, the methods of
determination for the others are given in Appendices, with a suitable reference in the monograph to the specific
Appendix.
An analyst is not precluded from employing an alternate method in any instance if one is satisfied that the method,
which one uses, will give the same result as the Pharmacopoeial method described under assay. However, in the
event of doubt or dispute the methods of analysis of the Pharmacopoeia are alone authoritative. Unless otherwise
prescribed, the assays and tests are carried out at a temperature between 20 and 300.
In the performance of an assay or any test procedure, not less than the specified number of dosage units or
quantities should be taken for analysis. Proportionately larger or smaller quantities than the specified weights
and volumes may be taken for substances under assay or test substances, Reference Standards or Standard
Preparations, provided the measurement is made with at least equivalent accuracy and provided that any
x
subsequent steps, such as dilutions, are adjusted accordingly to yield concentrations equivalent to those
specified and are made in such a manner as to provide at least equivalent accuracy.
Expression of Results: Total ash, acid-insoluble ash, water-soluble extractive, alcohol-soluble extractive, water
content, content of essential oil and content of active principle are calculated with reference to the drug that has not
been specially dried, unless otherwise prescribed in the monograph. In other words, all limits are thus proposed on
as such basis unless specified otherwise.
Limits for Heavy metals, Microbial load, Pesticide residues and Aflatoxins: Articles included in this
volume are required to comply with the limits for heavy metals, microbial contamination, pesticide residues
and aflatoxins prescribed in the individual monographs and wherever limit is not given in the monograph, they
must comply with the limits given in the respective Appendices. The methods for determination of these
parameters are given in the Appendices.
Thin-Layer Chromatography (TLC): Under this title, the Rf values given in the monographs are not absolute
but only indicative. The analyst may use any other solvent system and detecting reagent to establish the identity
of any particular chemical constituent reported to be present in the test substance. However, in case of dispute
the pharmacopoeial method would prevail. Unless specified in the individual monograph all TLC have been
carried out on pre-coated Silica gel 60F254 aluminium plates.
Reference Standards: Reference substance and standard preparation are authentic substances that have been
verified for their suitability, for use as standards for comparison in some assays, tests and TLC. The reference
standards, abbreviated as RS are issued by Pharmacopoeial Laboratory of Indian Medicine (PLIM).
Quantities to be weighed for Assays and Tests: In all descriptions quantity of the substance to be taken for
testing is indicated. The amount stated is approximate but the quantity actually used must be accurately weighed
and must not deviate by more than 10 per cent from the one stated.
Percentage of Solutions: In defining standards, the expression per cent (%) is used, according to
circumstances, with one of the four meanings given below.
Per cent w/w (percentage weight in weight) expresses the number of grams of active substance in 100 grams of product.
Per cent w/v (percentage weight in volume) expresses the number of grams of active substance in 100 milliliters
of product.
Per cent v/v (percentage volume in volume) expresses the number of milliliters of active substance in 100
milliliters of product.
Per cent v/w (percentage volume in weight) expresses the number of milliliters of active substance in 100 grams
of product.
Percentage of Alcohol: All statements of percentage of alcohol (C2H5OH) refer to percentage by volumes at 15.560.
Solubility: When stating the solubilities of chemical substances the term Soluble is necessarily sometimes
used in a general sense irrespective of concomitant chemical changes.
Statements of solubilities, which are expressed as a precise relation of weights of dissolved substance of volume
of solvent, at a stated temperature, are intended to apply at that temperature. Statements of approximate
solubilities for which no figures are given, are intended to apply at ordinary room temperature.
xi
Pharmacopoeial chemicals when dissolved may show slight physical impurities, such as fragment of filter papers,
fibres, and dust particles, unless excluded by definite tests in the individual monographs.
When the expression parts is used in defining the solubility of a substance, it is to be understood to mean that 1 gram of a
solid or 1 millilitre of a liquid is soluble in that number of millilitres of the solvent represented by the stated number of parts.
When the exact solubility of pharmacopoeial substance is not known, a descriptive term is used to indicate its solubility.
The following table indicates the meaning of such terms:Descriptive terms
Relative quantities of solvent
Very soluble
Freely soluble
Soluble
Sparingly soluble
Slightly soluble
Very slightly soluble
Practically insoluble
Less than 1 part.

From 1 to 10 parts.
From 10 to 30 parts.
From 1000 to 10,000 parts.
More than 10,000 parts.
Reagents and Solutions: Reagents required for the assay and tests of the Pharmacopoeia are defined in the
Appendix showing the nature, degree of the purity and strength of solutions to be made from them.
Therapeutic uses: Therapeutic uses wherever given are as mentioned in the API.
Doses: The doses mentioned in the monograph are in the metric system, which are approximate conversions from
classical weights mentioned in Ayurvedic texts. A conversion table is appended giving classical weights with their
metric equivalents (Appendix 5). Doses mentioned in the API are intended merely for general guidance and represent,
unless otherwise stated, the average range of quantities per dose which is generally regarded suitable by clinicians for
adults only when administered orally. They are not to be regarded as binding upon the prescribers.
Storage: Statement under the heading Storage constitutes non-mandatory advice. The substances and
preparations of the Pharmacopoeia are to be stored under conditions that prevent contamination and, as far as
possible, deterioration. Precautions, that should be taken in relation to the effects of the atmosphere, moisture,
heat and light, are indicated, where appropriate, in the individual monographs.
Specific directions are given in some monographs with respect to the temperatures at which Pharmacopoeial
articles should be stored, where it is considered that storage at a lower or higher temperature may produce
undesirable results. The conditions are defined by the following terms.
Cold- Any temperature not exceeding 80 and usually between 20 and 80. A refrigerator provides a cold place in
which the temperature is maintained thermostatically between 20 and 80.
Cool- Any temperature between 80 and 250. An article for which storage in a cool place is directed may,
alternately, be stored in a refrigerator, unless otherwise specified in the individual monograph.
Room temperature - The temperature prevailing in a working area.
Warm - Any temperature between 300 and 400.
Excessive heat- Any temperature above 400.
xii
Protection from freezing- Where, in addition to the risk of breaking of the container, freezing results in loss of
strength or potency or in destructive alteration of the characteristics of an article, the label on the container
bears an appropriate instruction to protect from freezing.
Storage under non-specific conditions- Where no specific storage directions or limitations are given in the individual
monograph, it is to be understood that the storage conditions include protection from moisture, freezing and excessive heat.
Packaging and Containers: In general the ASU extracts should be packed in well closed container i.e. one that
protects the contents from extraneous matter, moisture or loss of material under normal condition of handling.
The preferred packaging for extracts are a primary cover made up of 12 polyester, 100 polyethylene and a
secondary cover made up of 9 aluminium sandwiched between 2 layers of 12 polyester and 100
polyethylene. The tertiary package can be HDPE drums.
The container is the device that holds the article. The immediate container is that which is in direct contact with
the article at all times. The closure is a part of the container.
The container is designed so that the contents may be taken out for the intended purpose in a convenient manner.
It provides the required degree of protection to the contents from environmental hazards.
The container should not interact physically or chemically with the article placed in it so as to alter the strength,
quality or purity of the article beyond the official requirements.
Prior to its being filled, the container should be clean. Special precautions and cleaning procedures may be necessary
to ensure that each container is clean and that extraneous matter is not introduced into or onto the container.
Light-resistant Container- A light resistant container protects the contents from the effects of actinic light by
virtue of the specific properties of the material of which it is made. Alternatively, a clear and colourless or a
translucent container may be made light-resistant by means of an opaque (light-resistant) covering and/or stored
in a dark place: in such cases, the label on the container should bear a statement that an opaque covering or
storage in dark place is needed until the contents have been used up.
Well-closed Container- A well-closed container protects the contents from extraneous contamination and from
loss of contents under normal conditions of handling, shipment, storage and distribution.
Tightly-closed Container- A tightly-closed container protects the contents from contamination by extraneous
liquids solids or vapours, and from loss or deterioration of contents from effervescence, deliquescence or
evaporation under normal conditions of handling, shipment, storage and distribution.
Single Unit Container- A single unit container is one that is designed to hold a quantity of the drug product intended
for administration as a single finished device intended for use promptly after the container is opened. The immediate
container and/or outer container or protective packaging is so designed as to reveal evidence of tampering, if any.
Multiple Unit Container- A multiple unit container is a container that permits withdrawals of successive
portions of the contents without changing the strength, quality or purity of the remaining portion.
Tamper-evident Container- A tamper-evident container is fitted with a device or mechanism that reveals
irreversibly whether the container has been opened.
Labeling: In general, the labeling of drugs and pharmaceuticals is governed by the Drugs and Cosmetics Act,
1940 and Rules there under.
xiii
xiv

Pharmacopoeia Commission for Indian Medicine & Homoeopathy (PCIM&H) is an autonomous
organization under Ministry of AYUSH, Govt. of India with a primary mandate to develop
pharmacopoeial standards for drugs/formulations used under Ayurveda, Siddha, Unani and Homoeopathic
systems of medicine. It serves as an umbrella organization for Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia Committee
(APC), Siddha Pharmacopoeia Committee (SPC), Unani Pharmacopoeia Committee (UPC) and
Homoeopathic Pharmacopoeia Committee (HPC). Pharmacopoeial Laboratory for Indian Medicine
(PLIM) and Homoeopathic Pharmacopoeia Laboratory (HPL) are its permanent supporting structures.
The Commission was initially established as Pharmacopoeia Commission for Indian Medicine
(PCIM) in the year 2010. In pursuance to the decision of Central Government, Homoeopathy was
incorporated and the Commission was renamed as Pharmacopoeia Commission for Indian Medicine &
Homoeopathy (PCIM&H) on 25th June 2014. Commission has a three-tier structure of Governance
comprising of the General Body, Standing Finance Committee and Scientific Body. The Secretary,
Ministry of AYUSH, Govt. of India is ex-officio Chairman of the Commission.
Objectives
1.
Publication and revision of the Ayurvedic, Siddha, Unani and Homoeopathic Pharmacopoeia of
India at suitable intervals and of such addenda or supplementary compendia during the intervening
periods as may be deemed necessary; releasing the publications for public use from a date when
they are to become official.
2.
Publication and revision of the Ayurvedic, Siddha and Unani Formularies of India, Homoeopathic
pharmacopoeia as well as Homoeopathic Pharmaceutical Codex at regular intervals with a view to
make it an authentic source of information on rational combination and use of medicines including
their methods of preparation, therapeutic indications, adverse reactions, contra-indications, drug-drug
interactions and similar issues concerning Indian medicines for safe use in humans and animals.
Identification of Ayurvedic, Siddha and Unani formulations and Homoeopathic pharmacopoeia as well
as Homoeopathic Pharmaceutical Codex with a view to develop their quality standards and to ensure
quality and safety of ASU & H medicine.
3.
To nurture and promote awareness of quality in Ayurvedic, Siddha and Unani drugs/formulations,
Homoeopathic pharmacopoeia as well as Homoeopathic Pharmaceutical Codex and drug research
on ASU products and publish regularly or at suitable intervals other related scientific information
as authorized under the rules and procedures of the Commission.
4.
Exchange information and interact with expert committees of the World Health Organization and
other international bodies with a view to harmonize and develop the Ayurvedic, Siddha, Unani and
Homoeopathic Pharmacopoeial standards to make those internationally acceptable.
5.
Arranging studies either under its own auspices or through collaboration with other institutions to develop
standards and quality specifications for identity, purity and strength of raw materials and compound
formulations and to develop Standard Operating Procedures for the process of manufacture included or to
be included in the Ayurvedic, Siddha, Unani and Homeopathic Pharmacopoeia/formulary and its addenda
or supplementary compendia or other authorized publications.
6.
Maintain National repository of authentic reference raw materials used in the manufacture of
Ayurveda, Siddha, Unani and Homeopathic medicines for the purpose of reference and supply of
reference standards to the stake holders at a price.
xv
7.
To assign responsibilities described for Pharmacopoeial Laboratory for Indian Medicine and
Homoeopathic Pharmacopoeia Laboratory under the Drugs & Cosmetics Act.
8.
Generate and maintain repository of chemical reference marker compounds of the plants or other
ingredients used in standardizing Ayurveda, Siddha, Unani and Homeopathy medicines and supply
them as reference standards to the stake holders on price.
9.
Furtherance of the provision of Chapter IVA of Drugs and Cosmetic Act, 1940 in case ASU drugs &
4A of Schedule II of Drugs & Cosmetics Act in case of Homoeopathy medicine and rules there under
related to Ayurvedic, Siddha and Unani drugs and Homoeopathy medicine respectively.
10. Acting as a coordinating centre for analytical laboratories, industry and academia by encouraging
exchange of scientific and technical information and staff and by undertaking sponsored funded
research as well as consultancy projects.
11. Organizing national/international symposia, seminars, meetings and conferences in selected areas from
time to time and to provide updated regular training to the regulatory authorities and stake holders.
The General Body
The General Body is the apex body and is responsible for overall governance of the Commission.
Composition:
i)
Secretary, Ministry of AYUSH
Chairman
st
Sh. Nilanjan Sanyal until 31 August, 2015;
Sh. Ajit M. Sharan from 1st Sept., 2015
ii)
Joint Secretary, Ministry of AYUSH
Vice-Chairman - 1
st
Sh. Raj Pratap Singh until 1 Dec., 2014
Sh. Anurag Srivastav until 1st Nov., 2015
Sh. Jitendra Sharma from 2nd Nov., 2015
iii)
Chairman, Scientific Body, PCIM&H
Vice-Chairman - 2
Prof. S. S. Handa
iv)
Secretary and Director General, ICMR
Member
Dr. Soumya Swaminathan
v)
Chairman, CII or his nominee
Member
Sh. Sumit Mazumder
vi)
Chairman, FICCI or his nominee
Member
Mr. Harshavardhan Neotia
vii)
Drugs Controller General (India)
Member
Dr. G. N. Singh
viii) Central Drug Controller (AYUSH)
Member
ix)
Adviser (Ayurveda), Ministry of AYUSH
Member
Dr. Manoj Nesari
x)
Adviser (Unani), Ministry of AYUSH
Member
Prof. Rais-Ur-Rahman
xi)
Adviser (Homoeopathy), Ministry of AYUSH
Member
Dr. N. Radha
xii)
Eminent ASU&H experts (one from each system)
Members
1. Dr. Vaidya Balendu Prakash (Ayurveda Expert)
Turner Road, Dehradun, Uttarakhand
xvi
xiii)
xiv)
2. Dr. V. Arunachalam (Siddha Expert)

Dean, Santhigiri Health Care & Research Organization,
Santhigiri Ashramam, Santhigiri P.O,
Thiruvanathapuram-695589, Kerala
3. Dr. Mohd. Khalid Siddique (Unani Expert)
Former DG, CCRUM,
Jamia Hamdard Enclave, New Delhi
4. Dr. S. P. Singh (Homoeopathy Expert)
Former Adviser (Homoeopathy), S R B, 68-C Shipra Riviera.
Indirapuram, Ghaziabad-201014
One representative each of ASU&H Drug Manufacturers
1. Mr. Pramod Sharma (Ayurveda Industry)
Managing Director,
Shree Baidyanath Ayurvedic Bhawan (P) Ltd.
Patna 800001. Bihar
2. Dr. M. K. Thyagarajan (Siddha Industry)
IMPCOPS, Adayar, Chennai-600020
3. Dr. Ajmal K. P. (Unani Industry)
Hermas Herbal Unani Pharmaceuticals, Chennamangallur,
(PO) Mukkam, Calicutt-673602
4. Dr. P. N. Verma (Homoeopathy Industry)
Scientific Advisor, Dr. Willmar Schwabe India Pvt. Ltd,
Noida-201307
Director, PCIM&H
Dr. Rajeev Kr. Sharma
Members
Member Secretary
The Standing Finance Committee

All matters with respect to financial approvals are dealt by Standing Finance Committee. Standing Finance
Committee is responsible for screening/appraising/evaluating the projects/works etc. of the Commission
and recommend for the approval of these projects /works by the General Body.
Composition:
i)
Joint Secretary (AYUSH)
Sh. Raj Pratap Singh until 1st Dec., 2014
Sh. Anurag Srivastava until 1st Nov., 2015
Sh. Jitendra Sharma from 2nd Nov., 2015
ii)
Chairman, Scientific Body
Prof. S.S. Handa
iii)
Financial Adviser, M/o Health &Family Welfare
Smt. Vijaya Srivastava
iv)
Central Drug Controller (AYUSH)
v)
Director, PCIM&H
xvii
Chairman
Vice-Chairman
Member
Member
Member Secretary
The Scientific Body

The Scientific Body is responsible for designing/preparing and according technical approval for all the
scientific & technical works/projects and execution of these works/projects through different
Pharmacopoeia Committees / other agencies, publication of validated Pharmacopoeia after obtaining the
approval of the General Body.
Composition:
i)
Eminent Scientist or an ASU&H Expert with significant
experience in Pharmacopoeial work
Prof. S. S. Handa
ii)
Chairman, Indian Pharmacopoeia Commission or his nominee
Dr. G. N. Singh
iii)
Chairman, Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia Committee
Prof. V. K. Joshi
iv)
Chairman, Unani Pharmacopoeia Committee
Dr. G. N. Qazi
v)
Chairman, Siddha Pharmacopoeia Committee
Dr. G. Veluchamy
vi)
Chairman, Homoeopathic Pharmacopoeia Committee
Dr. C. Nayak
vii)
Director General, ICMR or his nominee (ASU Drugs Expert)
Dr. Soumya Swaminathan
viii)
Director General, CSIR or his nominee (ASU Drugs Expert)
Dr. Girish Sahni
ix)
Director General, Central Council for Research in Ayurvedic Sciences
Prof. K. S. Dhiman
x)
Director General, Central Council for Research in Unani Medicine
xi)
Director General, Central Council for Research in Siddha
Prof. R. S. Ramaswamy
xii)
Director General, Central Council for Research in Homoeopathy
Dr. R. K. Manchanda
xiii)
Central Drug Controller (AYUSH)
xiv)
Adviser (Ay.), Ministry of AYUSH
Dr. Manoj Nesari
xv)
Adviser (Unani), Ministry of AYUSH
xvi)
Adviser (Homoeopathy), Ministry of AYUSH
Dr. N. Radha
xvii) Dy. Adviser (Siddha), Ministry of AYUSH
Dr. K. Ravi (Joint Adviser)
xviii) Professional expert drawn one each from ASU&H industry
1. Dr. K. Anil Kumar, Managing Director,
Kerala Ayurveda Pharmacy Ltd. (KPL), Athani-683585,
Aluva, Kerala
2. Dr. S. Jahir Hussain, Sidha Physician,
QC Section, TAMPCOL, Alathur, Dist. Kanchipuram
3. Sh. Kafeel Ahmed, Manager,
Tibbiya College Dawakhana,
Aligarh Muslim University, Aligarh
4. Dr. Nishant Tripathi, General Manager,
xviii
Chairman
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Members
xix)
xx)
M. Bhattacharya & Co. Pvt. Ltd.

73, N. S. Road, Kolkata-700 001
One expert each from ASU&H Academia and Regulatory Bodies
1. Dr. G. S. Badesha, Director (Ayurveda),
Govt. of Chattisgarh, Raipur, Chattisgarh.
2. Dr. N. Kabilan, Associate Professor,
The Tamil Nadu Dr. M. G. R Medical University, Anna
salai, Guindy, Chennai-600 032
3. Prof. Yashmin Shamsi
Faculty of Unani Medicine,
Jamia Hamdard University, Delhi
4. Dr. S. K. Nanda, Director,
National Institute of Homoeopathy,
Kolkata-700106
Director, PCIM&H
Members
Member Secretary
Execution of Pharmacopoeial Work

Pharmacopoeia Committees
The Scientific and technical work of the Commission is being executed through Ayurvedic, Siddha, Unani
& Homoeopathic Pharmacopoeia committees under the supervision of the Scientific Body. The function
of Pharmacopoeia committees is to prepare official formularies, Pharmacopoeias of single drugs and
compound formulations, Pharmacopoeial codex and other technical documents related to standards for
drugs. The present composition of ASU&H Pharmacopoeia committees is as below:
I.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia Committee

Prof. V. K. Joshi
Chairman
B-6, New Medical Enclave, Nariya, Banaras Hindu University,
Varanasi-221005
Adviser (Ay.): Dr. Manoj Nesari
Member
Ministry of AYUSH, AYUSH Bhawan, B Block,
GPO Complex, INA, New Delhi- 110023
Director
Member
Pharmacopoeial Laboratory for Indian Medicine
Kamla Nehru Nagar, Ghaziabad- 201002
Director General: Prof. K. S. Dhiman
Member Secretary
Central Council for Research in Ayurvedic Sciences (CCRAS)
61-65, Institutional Area, Opp. D Block, Janakpuri, New Delhi- 110058
Prof. V. K. Kapoor
Member
1473, Pushpak Complex, Sector-49 B,
Chandigarh- 160047
Dr. Roopak Kumar
Member
Vice-President, Multani Pharmaceuticals Ltd., Analytical Division, Village:Makkanupur, Roorkee, Dist.- Haridwar- 237891
Prof. Karan Vashisth
Member
Former Head, University Institute of Pharmaceutical Science (UIPS),
Chandigarh-160014
Ms. S. Satakopan
Member
th
7/4 Padmam Flats, 7 street Nanganallur,
Chennai-600061
xix
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Dr. Malati Chauhan

IPGT&RA, Gujarat Ayurved University,
Jamnagar, Gujarat
Dr. J. L. N. Sastry
Head, Dabur Research & Development Center (DRDC),
Dabur India Limited 22, Site IV, Sahibabad (UP)
Dr. K. N. Dviwedi
Head, Deptt. of Dravyaguna, I.M.S., Banaras Hindu University,
Varanasi- 221005
Dr. S. K. Dixit
B-3/402, Shivala,
Varanasi-221005
Dr. S. S. Savrikar
Prof. & HOD Rasashastra & Bhaishajya Kalpana
Govt. Ayurvedic College & Hospital
Solapur Road, Madhuban, Osmanabad, Maharashtra- 413501
Dr. C. K. Katiyar
CEO Technical, Emami HCD,
Emami Towers, 5th Floor, 687, Anandapur,
E.M. Bypass, Kolkata-700107
Dr. P. M. Variar
Arya Vaidya Sala, Kottakkal,
Malappuram, Kerala-676503
Dr. Aditya Kaushik
Head-Medical Regulatory Affairs
Glaxo SmithKline Consumer Healthcare Ltd.,
Sector 32, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana
Dr. Shailesh Nadkarni
Shree Dhootapapeshwar Ltd.
135, Nanubai, Desai Road, Khetwadi, Mumbai- 400004
II.
Siddha Pharmacopoeia Committee
1.
Dr. G. Veluchamy
24, Chokkanathar Street, Karthikeyan Nagar,
Maduravoyal, Chennai-600095
Deputy Adviser (Siddha): Dr. K. Ravi (Joint Adviser)
Ministry of AYUSH, AYUSH Bhawan,
B Block, GPO Complex, INA, New Delhi- 110023
Director
Pharmacopoeial Laboratory for Indian Medicine
Director General: Prof. R. S. Ramaswamy
Central Council for Research in Siddha (CCRS)
SCRI, Anna Hospital Campus, Arumbakkam,
Chennai-600106
Dr. Sharada Vasanth
Former Research Officer (Chem.),
SCRI, Chennai-600106
Dr. K. Balakrishna
Former Research Officer (Chem.),
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
xx
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Chairman
Member
Member
Member Secretary
Member
Member
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
III.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Prof. V. Gopal
Principal, Govt. College of Pharmacy,
Mother Teresa PG Research Institute of Health Sciences,
Puducherry-605006
Dr. Sasikala Ethiraju
Research Officer (Pharmacognosy),
Dr. P. Jayaraman
Former Prof. of Botany,
Presidency College, Chennai
Dr. (Prof.) I. Sornamariammal
Former Joint Director of Indian Medicine,
Chennai
Dr. P. Kumar
Drug License Issuing Authority for ISM, Anna Hospital Campus,
Arumbakkam, Chennai
Prof. Jayprakash Narayanan
Former Vice-Principal,
Old NO. 55, New No. 70,
Panchaliamman Koil Street, Arumbakkam, Chennai-600106
Dr. Kumaravel
No. 25, II Street Ram Nagar,
North Extension Vijayanagar, Velacherry,
Chennai
Dr. V. Kalidass
Proprietor, Raja Siddha Marunthagam,
1/3, Dhermathupatty, Madurai- 625008
Dr. K. Vasanthira
Prof. of Pharmacology,
Stanley Medical College, Chennai
Dr. G. Thiyagarajan
Former Joint Director of ISM,
19/5, Arunachalapuram Street, Sandopalayam,
Aminjikarai, Chennai
Dr. T. Anandan
75, O Block, Ganapathy Colony,
Anna Nagar (E), Chennai
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Unani Pharmacopoeia Committee

Dr. G. N. Qazi,
Vice-Chancellor, Jamia Hamdard University,
Mehrauli Road, New Delhi- 110062
Adviser (Unani): Prof. Rais-Ur- Rahman
Director
Pharmacopoeial Laboratory for Indian Medicine,
Director General : Prof. Rais-Ur-Rahman
Central Council for Research in Unani Medicine (CCRUM)
61-65, Institutional Area, Opp. D Block, Janakpuri,
New Delhi- 110058
xxi
Chairman
Member
Member
Member Secretary
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
IV.
1.
2.
3.
Dr. Rahul Singh

Head, CQA Healthcare Products, Emami Group of Companies,
Emami Towers, 5th Floor, 687, Anandapur,
E.M. Bypass, Kolkata-700107
Dr. Arshad Khuroo,
Plot GP-5, Sector-18,
Udyog Vihar Industrial Area, Gurgoan-122001
Prof. Maninder Kaur
UIPS, Punjab University, Chandigarh
Dr. Deepak M.
Sr. Manager, Natural Remedies,
Plot No. 5B, Veersanda Indl. Area,
19th K.M. Stone, Hosur Road, Bangalore- 560100
Prof. Kunwar Mohammad Yusuf Amin
Deptt. of Ilmul Advia, AMU, Aligarh
Dr. Santosh Joshi
Head R&D, Hamdard Laboratories,
Meerut Road, Ghaziabad- 201010
Prof. Tajuddin
Former Dean, Deptt. of Saidla,
Faculty of Unani Medicine,
AKTC, AMU, Aligarh
Prof. M. Idris
Head, PG Deptt. of Ilmul Saidla,
Ayurveda & Unani Tibbia College,
Ajmal Khan Road, Karol Bagh, New Delhi-110005
Dr. Asad Mueed
Director, Hamdard (Wakf) Laboratories,
Hamdard Building,
2A/3 Asaf Ali Road, New Delhi-110002
Dr. M. U. R. Naidu
Plot No. 176/B 2, House No. 1-241,
Santh Nagar Co. H. Society, Motinagar, Hyderabad- 500018
Prof. Zillur Rehman
Former Dean, Faculty of Unani Medicine,
AMU, Aligarh
Dr. Absar Ahmad
Principal Scientist, Biochemical Division,
National Chemical Laboratory, Dr. Homi Bhabha Road,
Pune-411008
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Member
Homoeopathic Pharmacopoeia Committee

Dr. C. Nayak,
Ex-Director General, CCRH, New Delhi
House No. 55-B, Block No. C- 4-D
Janakpuri, New Delhi-110058
Adviser (Homoeopathy): Dr. N. Radha
Director
Homoeopathic Pharmacopoeia Laboratory,
xxii
Chairman
Member
Member
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Director General: Dr. R. K. Manchanda

Member Secretary
Central Council for Research in Homoeopathy (CCRH)
61-65, Institutional Area, Opp. D Block, Janakpuri,
New Delhi- 110058
Dr. B. N. Suhagia, Dean, Faculty of Pharmacy,
Member
Dharamsinh Desai University, Nadiad-387001, Gujarat
Dr. Dilip Pannakadda,
Member
Head, Department of Pharmacy,
National Institute of Homoeopathy
Kolkata-700106, West Bengal
Dr. (Mrs.) Shanta Mehrotra,
Member
Ex-Emeritus Scientist, NBRI,
HIG-91, Aliganj Extension, Sector-E,
Lucknow-226024
Dr. P. V. Santhosh
Member
Managing Director,
Kerala State Co-operative Homoeopathic Pharmacy,
XII/37 to 39, Mararikulam South,
Pathirappally P.O., Alappuzha - 688 521
Sh. Mohd. Faiyaz Alam,
Member
Technical Manager, SBL. Pvt. Ltd.
A/3, Site -4, Indl. Area Sahibabad, U.P.
Dr. Sohan Singh,
Member
Former Vice-Principal, JSPS Homoeopathic Medical College, Hyderabad.
House No 8-3-248/B/23/1, Opposite Times of India, Road No 3, Journalist
Colony, Banjara Hills, Hyderabad-500034
PCIM&H Secretariat:
Scientific and administrative support to Pharmacopoeia Committees extended by the followingDirector:
Joint Director:
Dr. Madhira Bhawanishankar
ASU&H:
Scientific Officers- Dr. V.Vijayakumar (Siddha), Dr. Nikhil Jirankalgikar & Dr. Vijay
Gupta (Ayurveda)
Chemistry:
Principal Scientific Officer- Dr. S. C. Verma; Scientific Officer- Dr. Anupam

Maurya
Pharmacognosy:
Principal Scientific Officer- Dr. Jayanthy A.; Scientific Officer- Dr. (Ms.) Nitin
Rai; Research Assistant- Sh. Jeetendra Kumar Vaishya, Sh. Suman Halder
Pharmacology:
Scientific Officer- Dr. Ramachandran S.
Secretarial Assistance: Sh. Pankaj Nagdeve, Sh. Afzal Hashmi, Sh. Sanjay Singh Rawat, Sh. Ashish Kumar,
Sh. Sunil Dahiya
xxiii
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Pharmacopoeia Commission for Indian Medicine & Homoeopathy expresses the gratitude towards
Prof. S. S. Handa, Chairman, APC (2009-2012) presently Chairman, Scientific Body of the Commission and
other erstwhile members and co-opted Members of the Ayurveda Pharmacopoeia Committee for their
continuous support in finalizing this volume. Thanks are reserved for Dr. S. K. Sharma, Vice Chairman APC,
Ms. Savita Satakopan, Member APC, and Dr. M. M. Padhi, Deputy Director General, CCRAS, Former
Director Incharge, PCIM for their enormous guidance, help, expert advice and critical views on the contents
of this volume.
The contributions made by the staff of the participating institutions viz., Natural Remedies Pvt. Ltd.
Bangalore, Chemolids Pvt. Ltd. Vijayawada, Green Chem Pvt. Ltd. Bangalore, Sanat Product Pvt. Ltd.
Bulendashar and Arjuna product Pvt. Ltd, Kochi associated with the APC project work for developing quality
standards of plant drugs and their hydroalcoholic and water extracts are duly acknowledged.
The Commission also sincerely thanks Dr. Pramila Pant, Assistant Director [Chem.]; Dr. Ravindra
Singh, Assistant Director [Chem.]; Dr. Bishnupriya Dhar, Former Assistant Director [Pcognosy]; Dr. Renu
Dixit, Ex-Consultant [Bot.] ; Dr. S. C. Verma, then Research Officer [Chem.], Dr. Shruti Khanduri, Research
Officer [Ay.]; Dr. B. S. Sharma, Research Officer [Ay.]; Dr. Chhote Lal, Dr. A. K. S. Bhadoria; Ms. Talat
Anjum, Research Officer [Bot.] and Mr. Chinmay Rath, then S.R.F [Bot.], Mr. Ashish Kumar, Ms.
Meenakshi, Ms. Deepti Anand D.E.O.s and other associated officers, for their constant efforts in bringing
out this volume. Thanks are also due to technical staff of Pharmacopoeial Laboratory Indian Medicine,
Ghaziabad.
Commission also acknowledges inputs and suggestions offered by Dr. Manoj Nesari, Adviser (Ay.),
Prof. K. S. Dhiman, Director General, CCRAS and Dr. Anupam Srivastava, Research Officer, S-2 (Ay.) from
Ministry of AYUSH.
Efforts of the scientific staff of the Commission Dr. Madhira Bhawanishankar, Dr. S. C. Verma,
Dr. Jayanthy A., Dr. Anupam Maurya, Dr. (Ms.) Nitin Rai, Dr. V. Vijayakumar, Dr. Nikhil Jirankalgikar,
Dr. Vijay Gupta, Dr. Ramachandran S., Sh. Jeetendra Kumar Vaishya and Sh. Suman Halder are appreciated
in bringing up this publication.
In last, thanks are due to all those who have directly or indirectly contributed in the preparation of
this volume.
xxiv
INTRODUCTION
The Ayurvedic system of medicine is prevalent in India since the vedic period and as early as the dawn of
human civilization. Though Ayurveda has undergone many changes in the course of its long history, it still remains
the mainstay of medical relief to a large section of population of the nation. Due to urbanization and dwindling of
forests, vaidya by and large is no longer self-contained unit collecting and preparing his own medicines as before.
He has now to depend on the newly developed agencies like one collecting and supplying the crude drugs and the
other undertaking mass production of medicines in the Ayurvedic pharmaceutical units run on commercial scale.
In view of the new trend in Ayurvedic pharmaceutical field, Government of India considered it expedient
to utilize the existing Drugs and Cosmetics Act 1940, to also control to a limited measure the Ayurvedic, Siddha
and Unani drugs by amending the Act.
The act was accordingly amended in 1964, to ensure only a limited control over the production and sale of
these medicines namely:i) The manufacture should be carried under prescribed hygienic conditions, under supervision of a
person having a prescribed qualification;
ii)
The raw materials used in the preparation of drugs should be genuine and properly identified
and
iii)
The formula or the true list of all the ingredients, contained in the drugs, should be displayed
on the label of every container.
The Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia Committee, (APC) constituted under the erstwhile Department of AYUSH
(vide letter No. 5-5/CCRAS-2006/Tech/APC/Hqrs. dated 12th March, 2009) Ministry of Health and Family Welfare,
Govt. of India initiated the exercise on present volume. This Pharmacopoeia Committee included Prof. S. S. Handa
(Chairman), Dr. S. K. Sharma (Vice Chairman), Dr. G. S. Lavekar (Member Secretary until February 2010) and Dr.
Ramesh Babu Devalla (Member Secretary) and other eminent experts in respective fields. The work was further
carried out under auspices of PCIM&H and duly approved by its Governing Body.
xxv
SPECIAL INTRODUCTION TO VOLUME IX

(EXTRACTS)
Contrary to popular preparation, Ayurvedic therapeutic modes or presentations in current usage have
had a long history of development. Ayurvedic techniques of formulating compound mixtures (yogas) developed
gradually from the pre-Vedic period through the Vedic, the Sahit, and the Sagraha periods and continue to
develop. In the Sahit period, ancient indigenous science was at the peak of its glory and we find that almost
all the pharmaceutical modes, now identified as classical were known during this period.
From the scanty evidences and interpretations available about the pre-Vedic period, one naturally
concluded that the pre-Vedic Indian employed only a few pharmaceutical modes and that methods in pharmacy
were rather simple. Raw materials were used in their crude form, whole, or at best comminuted, to assist
application. Extraction was limited to expression of fresh juice or extracting by decoction.
During the Vedic period preparation of medicines might have gained importance, as fire and pyre
sacrifices were popular practices followed during the period, but complex formulations and combination of
drugs did not appear during this period. Single drugs, their juices and pastes were the main forms in use. It is
doubtful whether the formulation, in its contemporary sense, was practiced in the Vedic period. In the Vedas,
we find praises of single drugs. No complex mixtures of medicines are traceable in the Vedic literature.
We find that systematized information on Ayurvedic pharmacy appears in the compendia of the
Sahit period. It is in these texts that complicated compounding procedures as well as multi-ingredient
formulations are recorded. Tips on formulations, concepts of compatibility and incompatibility among
ingredients, systematic classification of preparations etc. are also available in these books. Though the oldest
available Samhita contains references to almost all the classical pharmaceutical modes, it is not logical to
conclude that all of them developed simultaneously. Hence, we may consider that primary preparations or basic
modes were the most ancient. These work technically termed Kaya Kalpan. Five primary preparations,
such as expressed juice (Svarasa), paste (Kalka), decoction (Kvtha), cold infusion (ta Kaya) and hot
infusion (Pha Kaya) are mentioned in the ancient classics. All these modes have very short shelf life and
hence were prepared as and when needed. More stable forms generated as secondary and tertiary preparations
or derived modes such as medicated fatty preparations (oils, ghta, etc.), Jelly or semi solid preparations
(Avaleha), fermented products (Aria, sava etc.) & Pills (Guik) were yet another means of presentation of
drugs. Apart from many other factors, fats, sugar and alcohol were known to be natural preservatives.
During the Sagraha period, we find from recorded literature that formulations based on metals and
minerals gained usage. This is on par with the development of Ayurvedic iatro-chemistry known as Rasastra.
Some pharmaceutical modes such as syrups also appeared in Ayurvedic pharmacy. This was mainly due to the
influence of Unani medicine that emanated from Middle East. In fact, it started even as early as the invasion of
Alexander the Great, but attained great growth due to the active contribution by Moghuls in Medieval India.
A gradual shift in practice from extemporaneous and need based production, to a more organized and
planned long term production ensured ready medicines round the year. This trend was evident as early as the
10th century AD, but got established at the dawn of the 20th century, resulting in a change in the pattern of drug
production, and improvement in its technology. Ayurvedic pharmacy by this time faced challenges from
Western medicines and modern methods of pharmacy during the British rule. There were efforts to replace
aqueous decoctions of indigenous medicines with tinctures but such changes faced stiff opposition from the
conservative section of Ayurvedic physicians.
xxvi
Present trend:
Since the last half a century, Ayurveda has had to compete with modern medicines, which are proven
to be quick-acting, strong and effective. Convenience and acceptability of these medicines by patients was
another factor that necessitated the Ayurvedic fraternity to modernize. Many manufacturers shifted their
traditional preparation like Va and Guik to compressed tablets and capsules. There were attempts to achieve
greater shelf life for traditional medicines, by adopting newer techniques of extraction, chemical preservation
and application of modern principles in Ayurvedic pharmacy.
A recent trend in Ayurvedic manufacturing pharmacy aims at (1) enhancement of potency and reduction
in bulk of dosage form (2) convenience in administering doses and (3) acceptability by improving palatability.
This trend is an outcome of significant gains in knowledge of phyto-chemical contents of the source
plant, and improved methods of assessing the pharmacological and therapeutic actions of such phytochemical
contents. A direct development of this awareness is the introduction of extracts of plants as a more effective
means of obtaining desirable results.
EXTRACTS
Extraction, as the term is used in Pharmacy, involves the separation of medicinally active portion from
plant or animal tissues using selective solvents through standard extraction procedures. The general techniques
of extraction of medicinal plants include maceration, infusion, percolation, digestion, decoction, hot continuous
extraction (soxhlet), aqueous alcoholic extraction by fermentation (such as sava) counter current extraction
(CCE), microwave assisted extraction, ultrasound extraction (sonication), supercritical fluid extraction (SFE),
etc. Such extraction techniques separate out soluble plant metabolites leaving behind insoluble cellular marc.
The product so obtained from plants are relatively complex mixtures of a number of groups of plant metabolites.
Extracts are prepared by using an appropriate menstruum, with a view to extraction of active principles
or at least elimination of the inert bulk. Hence, modernization of Ayurvedic drug industry is experimenting
with various extraction techniques. More and more capsules and tablets appearing in the market are based on
products using extraction techniques. Even liquids like syrups, medicated oils and other oral suspensions
depend on the extracts. Extraction is essential to reduce the bulk of the drug material and enhance its potency,
acceptability and convenience of administration of the drug. The purpose of standardized extraction procedures
for crude drugs is to acquire the therapeutically desired portion and eliminate inert material, by treatment with
a selective solvent known as menstruum. The extract thus obtained is used as a medicinal agent directly, or
further processed to be incorporated in any dosage form such as tablet, capsule or syrup etc. Standardized
extract for use in a pharmacopoeia indicates an extract having an acceptable limit of the given content, specified
by a biomarker or chemical/analytical marker. The extract should specify the defined range for the constituents
(biomarker or chemical/analytical marker). Dry extracts usually have a loss on drying or water content not
greater than 5 per cent w/w, unless specified otherwise in any monograph. In the cases of standardized extracts,
the presence and content of the inert permissible excipients including preservatives, if any, should be declared
on the label.
Extracts shall be free from solvents used for the extraction and shall comply with the respective limits
(Appendix 3.8). Harmful and carcinogenic solvents shall not be used for extraction purposes.
Extracts may be exposed to ethylene oxide for fumigation or low dose gamma radiation for the purpose
of avoiding microbial contamination. In cases where the extracts are fumigated, the final extracts exposed shall
meet residual levels of ethylene dioxide limits as applicable. Herbs treated with low dose of gamma radiations
shall meet national regulations related to such a treatment and shall be labeled as per law.
xxvii
Phyto-chemical Reference Standards as Markers:

Extracts are usually complex mixtures of several chemical constituents. For a large majority of
botanical extracts it is not known with certainty which of the various components is responsible for the reported
pharmacological effect. It is generally believed that several constituents act synergistically to provide the
reported effect. For articles for which compendial monographs are provided, certain chemical constituents of
the article are chosen and quantitative test procedures for determining their content are provided. The choice
of such constituents, known generally as marker compounds, is based on certain considerations. Currently, the
following types of marker compounds are specified in compendial monographs and may be identified in raw
materials:
Active Principles:
These are constituents that have proven clinical activity. A minimum content or range for the active
principles is usually specified in the individual monograph. A quantitative determination of active principles
carried out periodically during stability studies of dosage forms provides necessary information for arriving at
suitable expiry dates.
Active Markers:
These are constituents that have known pharmacological activity contributing in some extent to its
efficacy. However, the clinical efficacy for these constituents may not be proven. A minimum content or range
for active markers is usually specified in individual monographs. A quantitative determination of active markers
during stability studies of dosage forms provides necessary information for arriving at suitable expiry dates.
Analytical Markers:
Where neither defined active principles nor active markers are known, other constituents of the
botanical extract amenable to quantitative determination are chosen. These markers aid in the positive
identification of the article under text. In addition, maintaining a minimum content or a specified range of the
analytical markers helps to achieve standardization of the plant extract and to arrive at a suitable expiry date
during stability studies.
Negative Markers:
These are constituents that may have toxic or allergenic properties, rendering their presence in the
botanical extract undesirable as for example -asarone from Vac (Acorus calamus). A stringent limit for such
negative markers may be specified in individual monographs.
Monograph on Plant Extracts:
Monograph of an extract in the pharmacopoeia is to provide qualitative and quantitative standards of
quality for the extract for its use as a food item or a food supplement, dietary supplement/ nutraceutical, as a
drug and/or as an ingredient in cosmetics. Each of such use would need to comply with applicable regulations.
As per quality criteria, the plant extract in its entirety, is defined as the active substance. Consequently, all
relevant aspects of quality of an extract must be considered and these include plant material, solvent used for
extraction, extraction technology employed and manufacturing equipment used.
Methodology:
Fifteen single plant drugs were selected for preparing aqueous and hydro-alcoholic dried extracts.
Authenticity, purity and quality of each of the fifteen plant drugs and their powders was confirmed before
preparing hydro-alcoholic extract and water extract. In order to make this volume self-containing and
xxviii
comprehensive, monograph of the selected whole plant drug, hydro-alcoholic extract and water extract have
been prepared.
The work of preparing extracts using identical standard operating procedures was allotted to different
extract manufacturers in two groups viz., Natural Remedies Pvt. Ltd. Bangalore, Chemolids Pvt. Ltd.
Vijayawada and Green Chem Pvt. Ltd. Bangalore in one group and Sanat Product Pvt. Ltd. Bulendashar, Arjuna
Products Pvt. Ltd, Kochi and Amsar Pvt. Ltd. Indore in other group. Both the groups are co-ordinated by
Natural Remedies Pvt. Ltd. Bangalore. Raw material was procured in one lot and distributed among the three
collaborators. Data generated was shared on three batches of each. Comprehensive reproducible data has been
incorporated in the monographs.
The monographs on fifteen plant drugs have been already included in earlier volumes of API, Part I.
They have now been upgraded by the addition of Thin Layer Chromatography, finger print profiling using
Phyto-Chemical Reference Standard (PRS). New addition of assay for the PRS has been also added to make
the monograph comparable to international standards.
Keeping in view the use of extracts in Ayurvedic formulations, the Drugs and Cosmetics 5th
Amendment Rule, 2010 under 158 (B) clause IV issues guidelines with respect to Auadha Ghana (Medicinal
Plant extracts- dry/wet) obtained from plants mentioned in books of First Schedule of the Act including
aqueous, hydro-alcoholic and other than aqueous and hydro-alcoholic extracts.
In the light of this latest amendment in the Drugs and Cosmetics Rule 158 (B) clause IV, the Ayurvedic
Pharmacopoeia Committee considers it appropriate to prepare monographs on plant extracts and in this Volume
IX of the API, Part I, standards for aqueous and hydro-alcoholic extracts are presented. To start with, 15
traditionally well-known medicinal plants have been selected and this volume contains upgraded monographs
on 15 source plants, their aqueous and hydro-alcoholic extracts, thus comprising a total of 45 monographs, for
ensuring their quality for use as drug ingredients.
We offer this Volume for public use and welcome comments and criticisms to enhance its value in
future revisions and additions.
xxix
ABBREVIATIONS FOR TECHNICAL TERMS

0
C
cells containing pigments
centimeter(s)
cluster crystals of calcium oxalate
concentrated
diameter
dilute
gram per liter
gram(s)
hour(s)
kilogram(s)
litre(s)
meta
meter(s)
micron (0.001mm)
microgram per milliliter
microliter
micrometer
milligram(s)
milliliter per minute
milliliter(s)
millimeter
minute(s)
Molarity
nanogram
nanoliter
nanometer
Normality
ortho
para
parts per billion
parts per million
phloem fibres
rate per minute
ccp
cm
clr
con.
dia.
dil.
g/l
g
h
kg
l
m
m
g/ml
l
m
mg
ml/min
ml
mm
min
M
ng
nl
nm
N
o
p
ppb
ppm
phf
rpm
xxx
Reference Standard
Refractive index detector
rosette crystals of calcium oxalate
specific gravity
starch grains
Ultraviolet
volume
volume in volume
volume in weight
weight
weight in volume
weight in weight
xxxi
RS
RI detector
ro
sp.gr.
sg
UV
vol
v/v
v/w
wt
w/v
w/w
INDO-ROMANIC EQUIVALENTS FOR DEVANGAR ALPHABETS

+
+
<
<
=
>
@
B
B
+
+
:
E
J
M
P
R
S
U
V
Z
\
]
`
AI
ai
AU
au
KA
ka
KHA
kha
GA
ga
GHA
gha
CA
ca
CHA
cha
JA
ja
JHA
jha
HA
ha
b
f
h
i
l
n
v
x
{
I
j
Y
xxxii
HA
ha
TA
ta
THA
tha
DA
da
DHA
dha
NA
na
PA
pa
PHA
pha
BA
ba
BHA
bha
MA
ma
YA
ya
RA
ra
LA
la
VA
va
SA
sa
HA
ha
KA
ka
TRA
tra
JA
ja
CONTENTS
FOREWORD
PREFACE
LEGAL NOTICES
GENERAL NOTICES
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
INTRODUCTION
SPECIAL INTRODUCTION TO VOLUME IX (EXTRACTS)
ABBREVIATIONS FOR TECHNICAL TERMS
INDO-ROMANIC EQUIVALENTS OF DEVANGAR ALPHABETS
MONOGRAPHS
Apmrga
1.
Apmrga Hydro-alcoholic extract
2.
Apmrga Water extract
3.
Asana
4.
Asana Hydro-alcoholic extract
5.
Asana Water extract
6.
Druharidr
7.
Druharidr Hydro-alcoholic extract
8.
Druharidr Water extract
9.
10. Dhr Vkmla
11. Dhr Vkmla Hydro-alcoholic extract
12. Dhr Vkmla Water extract
13. Kauk
14. Kauk Hydro-alcoholic extract
15. Kauk Water extract
16. Maji
17. Maji Hydro-alcoholic extract
18. Maji Water extract
19. Meag
20. Meag Hydro-alcoholic extract
21. Meag Water extract
22. Meth
23. Meth Hydro-alcoholic extract
24. Meth Water extract
25. Nigu
26. Nigu Hydro-alcoholic extract
27. Nigu Water extract
28. Punarnav
29. Punarnav Hydro-alcoholic extract
30. Punarnav Water extract
31. allak
32. allak Hydro-alcoholic extract
xxxiii
iii
v
vii
viii
xv
xxiv
xxv
xxvi
xxx
xxii
1
5
7
9
12
14
16
19
21
23
25
27
29
32
34
36
39
41
43
47
49
51
54
56
58
61
63
65
68
70
72
74
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
allak Water extract

ira
ira Hydro-alcoholic extract
ira Water extract
uh
uh Hydro-alcoholic extract
uh Water extract
Svarapatr
Svarapatr Hydro-alcoholic extract
Svarapatr Water extract
Tulas
Tulas Hydro-alcoholic extract
Tulas Water extract
Appendix - 1
1.1 Apparatus for Tests and Assays
1.1.1
Nessler Cylinders
1.1.2
Sieves
1.1.3
Thermometers
1.1.4
Ultraviolet Lamp (For general purposes and for chromatography work)
1.1.5
Volumetric Glassware
1.1.6
Weights and Balances
Appendix - 2
2.1 Tests and Determinations
2.1.1.
Microscopical identification of Botanical Substances
2.1.2.
Net Content
2.1.3.
Determination of Foreign Matter
2.1.4.
Determination of Moisture content (Loss on Drying)
2.1.5.
Determination of Total Ash
2.1.6.
Determination of Water-soluble Ash
2.1.7.
Determination of Acid-insoluble Ash
2.1.8.
Determination of Alcohol-soluble Extractive
2.1.9.
Determination of Water-soluble Extractive
2.1.10. Determination of pH Value
2.1.11. Determination of Total-soluble Solids
2.1.12. Determination of Volatile oil in drugs
Appendix - 3
3.1 Test for Heavy Metals
3.1.1
Limits for Heavy Metals
3.1.2
Determination of Lead, Cadmium, Arsenic and Mercury
3.2 Microbial Limit Tests
3.2.1
Total Aerobic Microbial Count
3.2.2
Tests for Specified Microorganisms
3.3 Pesticide Residue
3.3.1
Test for Pesticides
3.3.2
Quantitative Analysis
3.4 Test for Aflatoxins
xxxiv
76
78
81
83
85
88
90
92
95
97
99
102
104
109
109
109
109
109
109
110
110
111
111
111
113
113
113
113
114
114
114
114
114
115
115
117
117
117
117
117
122
124
127
128
129
129
3.5 Thin-Layer Chromatography (TLC)

3.5.1
Quantitative Measurement
3.6 Liquid Chromatography
3.7 Spectrophotometry
3.8 Test for Residual Solvent
3.9 Stability Testing and Shelf Life Determination
3.9.1
Scope and Objective
3.9.2
General Information on Stability
3.9.3
Selection Batches
3.9.4
Container and Closure system
3.9.5
Specification
3.9.6
Testing frequency
3.9.7
Storage condition
3.9.8
Evaluation
4 Reagents and Chemicals
5 Weights and Measures
5.1
Metric Equivalents of Classical Weights and Measures
5.2
Metric System
xxxv
130
132
133
133
134
136
136
136
136
136
137
137
137
138
139
145
145
146
API, Part-I, Vol.-IX (Extracts); Monographs
APMRGA
Apmrga consists of dried whole plant of
Achyranthes aspera L. (Fam. Amaranthaceae); a
stiff, erect, 0.3-0.9 m high herb, found commonly
as a weed throughout India up to 900 m.
Apmrga contains not less than 0.002 per cent
of oleanolic acid when assayed.
Fruit - Indehiscent, dry utricle enclosed within

persistent perianth and bracteoles
Synonyms:
Root - Mature root shows 3-8 layered, rectangular,

tangentially elongated, thin-walled cork cells;
secondary cortex consisting of 6-9 layers, oval to
rectangular, thin-walled, parenchymatous cells
having a few scattered single or groups of stone
cells; followed by 4-6 discontinuous rings of
anomalous secondary thickening composed of
vascular tissues; small patches of sieve tubes
distinct in phloem parenchyma, demarcating the
xylem rings; xylem composed of usual elements;
vessels simple pitted; medullary rays 1-3 cells wide;
small prismatic crystals of calcium oxalate present
in cortical region and numerous in medullary rays
Mayraka,
Kharamajar, ikhar
Other/Regional
Seed - Sub-cylindric, truncate at the apex, round

at the base, endospermic, brown
b) Microscopic:
Pratyakpupa,
Language
Names:
Assamese: Chirchita; Bengali: Apamg; English:

Prickly Chaff Flower; Gujarati: Aghedo; Hindi:
Chirchita, Latjira; Kannada: Uttarani; Malayalam:
Katalati; Marathi: Aghada; Punjabi: Puthakanda;
Tamil: Nayuruvi; Telugu: Uttarenu; Urdu: Chirchita
Description:
a) Macroscopic:
Root - Cylindrical tap root, slightly ribbed, 0.1-1.0
cm in thickness, gradually tapering, rough due to
presence of some root scars, secondary and tertiary
roots present, yellowish-brown; odour, not distinct
Stem - Young stem shows 6-10 prominent ridges,

which diminish downwards upto the base where it
becomes almost cylindrical; epidermis single
layered, covered by thick cuticle having uniseriate,
2-5 celled, covering trichomes and glandular with
globular head, 3-4 celled stalk; cortex 6-10 layered,
composed of parenchymatous cells, most of them
containing rosette crystals of calcium oxalate; in the
ridges cortex collenchymatous; vascular bundles lie
facing each ridge capped by pericyclic fibres;
transverse section of mature stem shows lignified,
thin-walled cork cells; pericycle a discontinuous
ring of lignified fibres; vascular tissues show
anomalous secondary growth having 4-6
incomplete rings of xylem and phloem; secondary
phloem consisting of usual elements form
incomplete rings; cambial strips present between
secondary xylem and phloem; secondary xylem
consists of vessels annular, spiral, scalariform and
elongately pitted, fibres elongated, lignified; pith
wide consisting of oval to polygonal,
parenchymatous cells
Stem - 0.3-0.5 cm in cut pieces, yellowish-brown, erect,

branched, cylindrical, hairy, solid, hollow when dry
Leaf - Simple, subsessile, exstipulate, opposite,
decussate, wavy margin, obovate, slightly
acuminate and pubescent due to the presence of
thick coat of long simple hairs
Flower - Arranged in inflorescence of long
spikes, greenish-white, numerous, sessile,
bracteate with two bracteoles, one spine lipped,
bisexual, actinomorphic, hypogynous; perianth
segments 5, free, membranous, contorted or
quincuncial, stamens 5, opposite the perianth
lobes, connate forming a membranous tube-like
structure, alternating with truncate and fimbriate
staminodes, filament short; anther, two celled,
dorsifixed; gynoecium bicarpellary, syncarpous;
ovary superior, unilocular with single ovule; style
single; stigma capitate
Leaf - Petiole - Shows crescent-shaped outline,

having single-layered epidermis with thick cuticle;
ground tissues consisting of thin-walled,
parenchymatous cells containing rosette crystals of
calcium oxalate; 4-5 vascular bundles situated in mid
region
Midrib - Shows a single layered epidermis, on both
surfaces; epidermis followed by 4-5 layered
collenchyma on upper side and 2-3 layered on lower
side; ground tissue consisting of thin-walled,
parenchymatous cells having a number of vascular
bundles; each vascular bundle shows below the
xylem vessels, thin layers of cambium, followed by
phloem and a pericycle represented by 2-3 layers of
thick-walled, non-lignified cells; rosette crystals of
calcium oxalate found scattered in ground tissues
Lamina - Shows single layered, tangentially
elongated epidermal cells covered with thick
cuticle having covering trichomes, similar to
those of stem, on both surfaces; mesophyll
differentiated into palisade and spongy
parenchyma, palisade 2-4 layered of thick
parenchyma; larger, slightly elongated in upper,
while smaller and rectangular in lower surface;
spongy parenchyma 3-5 layers thick, consisting
of more or less isodiametric parenchymatous
cells; idioblast containing large rosette crystals of
calcium oxalate distributed in palisade and
spongy parenchyma cells; stomata anisocytic and
anomocytic, on both surfaces; stomatal index 4.59.0 on upper surface, 9.0-20.0 on lower surface;
palisade ratio 7.0-11; vein islet number 7-13
Fig. 1: Powdered drug of APMRGA

(Achyranthes aspera L.)
Identity, Purity and Strength:

Identification:
Thin-layer chromatography:
Carry out thin-layer chromatography on a precoated
silica gel 60F254 plate (Appendix 3.5) using oleanolic
acid as a reference standard. Test solution: Extract 2
g of substance by refluxing with 50 per cent methanol
(50 ml x 3) for a period of 30 min each, cool and
filter. Combine all the filtrates, concentrate and
transfer to a 100-ml round bottomed flask. Add 20 ml
of 2 M methanolic hydrochloric acid and reflux at 60700 on a water bath for 3 hours, cool and transfer the
solution to a separating flask, extract with chloroform
(25 ml x 3). Combine all the organic extracts and
wash gently with water. Pass the combined
chloroform extract through anhydrous sodium
sulphate and evaporate the chloroform under
vacuum. Dissolve the residue obtained in 10 ml of
methanol. Standard solution: Dissolve 10 mg of
oleanolic acid RS in about 10 ml of methanol.
c) Powder:
Powder shows simple, multicellular, sharp or blunt
ended, warty or smooth trichomes; lower epidermal
cells of leaf showing sinuous walls, and upper with
fairly straight walls, glandular trichomes with
globular head of 3 or 4 cells, anisocytic and
anomocytic stomata, thick-walled and thin-walled
fibres with sharp or forked ends; cork tissue,
fragments of pitted vessels; prismatic and rosette
and sandy crystals of calcium oxalate scattered as
such throughout or in idioblasts (Fig. 1)
2
Visible after derivatisation

Rf
residues: Complies with the prescribed limits,

(Appendix 3.3); Aflatoxins: Complies with the
prescribed limits, (Appendix 3.4)
1.0
Assay:
Carry out the assay by liquid chromatography
(Appendix 3.6). Test solution: Take about 2 g,
accurately weighed, of the substance being
examined and reflux with 50 per cent methanol (50
ml x 3) on a water bath for 30 min each, cool and
filter. Combine all the filtrates, concentrate and
transfer to a 100 ml round bottomed flask. Add 20
ml of 2 M methanolic hydrochloric acid and reflux
at 60-700 on a water bath for 3 hours, cool and
transfer the solution to a separating flask, extract
with chloroform (25 ml x 3). Combine all the
organic extracts and wash gently with water, pass
the combined chloroform extract through
anhydrous sodium sulphate and evaporate the
chloroform under vacuum. Dissolve the residue
obtained in 5 ml of methanol, transfer to a 10-ml
volumetric flask and make up the volume. Filter
through 0.42 m membrane. Standard solution:
Take about 10 mg, accurately weighed, oleanolic
acid RS in a 100 ml volumetric flask and dissolve in
50 ml of methanol and make up the volume with
methanol. Filter through 0.42 m membrane.
Chromatographic system: High performance liquid
chromatography. Column and stationary phase:
C18 (100 mm x 3.0 mm, 2.5 m). Mobile phase:
Filtered and degassed mixture of 33 volumes of
phosphate buffer (prepared by dissolving 0.14 g of
potassium dihydrogen orthophosphate in 900 ml of
water, adding 1 ml of orthophosphoric acid and
making up the volume to 1000 ml) and 67 volumes
of acetonitrile. Injection volume: 20 l. Flow rate:
0.3 ml per min. Detection: UV 205 nm. Procedure:
Inject 20 l of the standard solution and record the
chromatogram. Inject 20 l of the test solution,
record the chromatogram and measure the response
for the analyte peak. Calculate the content of
oleanolic acid in the substance being examined
from the peak response of analyte. The test is not
valid unless the relative standard deviation for
replicate injections is not more than 2.0 per cent.
0.5
0.0
RS
T
Fig. 2: Thin-Layer Chromatogram of Apmrga
RS: Oleanolic acid, T: Test solution
Procedure: Apply 10 l each of the test and standard
solutions as bands at a height of 10 mm from the base
of a 10 x 5 cm TLC plate and develop up to 8 cm
from the base of the plate using the mobile phase:
ethyl acetate : toluene : formic acid (45.0 : 0.5 : 0.1).
Dry the plate in air. Spray the plate with 10 per cent
methanolic sulphuric acid reagent and heat at 1050 till
the colour of the spots/bands appear without
charring. The chromatographic profile of the test
solution shows a band corresponding to that of the
standard solution (Fig. 2).
Quantitative parameters:
Foreign matter: not more than 2.0 per cent
(Appendix 2.1.3); Loss on drying: not more than
12.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.4); Total ash: not
more than 17.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.5); Acidinsoluble ash: not more than 5.0 per cent
(Appendix 2.1.7); Alcohol-soluble extractive: not
less than 2.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.8); Watersoluble extractive: not less than 12.0 per cent
(Appendix 2.1.9)
Other requirements:
Heavy metals: Complies with the prescribed limits,
(Appendix 3.1); Microbial contamination: Complies
with the prescribed limits, (Appendix 3.2); Pesticide
3
Constituents: Oleanolic acid glycosides;

ecdysterone, ecdysone, betaine, tritriacontanone,
pentatriacontan-17-ol, 27-cyclohexylheptacosan7-ol, 16-hydroxy-26-methylheptacosan-2-one, 4methylheptatriacont-1-en-10-ol, etracontanol, sitosterol, pentatriacontane, pentatriacontan-6one, hexatriacontane, triacontane, hentriacontane,
octacosan-10-one,
triacosan-4-one;
lauric,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, oleic, linoleic, arachidic
and behenic acids
Properties and Action: Rasa: Kau, Tikta;
Fig. 3: HPLC chromatogram of Apmrga

with Oleanolic acid as RS
Additional requirements:
Gua: Sara, Tka; Vrya: Ua; Vipka: Kau;

Karma: Chedana, Kaphahara, Medohara, Pcana,
Vtahara
Storage: Store in well closed container protected

from heat, light, moisture and against attack by
insects and rodents.
Apmrgakra
taila,
Guapippal, Jyotimat taila
Important formulations: Abhy lavaa,

Therapeutic
Apac (chronic
lymphadenopathy/scrofula), Ara (piles), Ka
(pruritis), Medoroga (obesity), la (pain),
Udararoga (disease of abdomen)
Labelling: The label states the official name,

followed by the Latin binominal name and the
part of the plant contained in the article.
API reference standard:
Dose: Cra (powder): 3-6 g
API Oleanolic acid RS
uses:
Apmrgakra,
APMRGA HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT

methanol. Procedure: Apply 10 l each of the test
and standard solutions as bands at a height of 10
mm from the base of a 10 x 5 cm TLC plate and
develop up to 8 cm from the base of the plate
using the mobile phase: ethyl acetate : toluene :
formic acid (45.0 : 0.5 : 0.1). Dry the plate in air.
Spray the plate with 10 per cent methanolic
sulphuric acid reagent and heat at 1050 till the
colour of the spots/bands appear without charring.
The chromatographic profile of the test solution
shows a band corresponding to that of the
Apmrga Hydro-alcoholic Extract is a dried and

powdered extract prepared from Apmrga
(appropriately powdered). The extract contains not
less than 0.08 per cent of oleanolic acid when assayed.
Method of Preparation:
Take Apmrga suitably sized (powder or pieces)
in an extractor. Add 50.0 per cent aqueous
alcohol, about 3 times the quantity of raw material
and heat under reflux at a temperature between
80-850 for 3-4 hours. Filter the extract through a
filter (preferably 10 m pore size) to a suitable
sized vessel. The marc is extracted three times
more, filtering the extract each time into the same
vessel. Concentrate the combined filtrate to a
syrupy consistency and dry under vacuum
(between 400-600 mm of Hg) at a temperature not
exceeding 800 till the moisture is below 5 per
cent. Mill the mass and sieve the powder through
500 m mesh to obtain the extract and pack. The
yield obtained is about 7 per cent.

Rf
1.0
0.5

Carry out thin-layer chromatography on a
precoated silica gel 60F254 plate (Appendix 3.5)
using oleanolic acid as a reference standard. Test
solution: Extract 2 g of substance by refluxing
with 50 per cent methanol (50 ml x 3) for a period
of 30 min each, cool and filter. Combine all the
filtrates, concentrate and transfer to a 100-ml
round bottomed flask. Add 20 ml of 2 M
methanolic hydrochloric acid and reflux at 60-700
on a water bath for 3 hours, cool and transfer the
solution to a separating flask, extract with
chloroform (25 ml x 3). Combine all the organic
extracts and wash gently with water. Pass the
combined chloroform extract through anhydrous
sodium sulphate and evaporate the chloroform
under vacuum. Dissolve the residue obtained in
10 ml of methanol. Standard solution: Dissolve
10 mg of oleanolic acid RS in about 10 ml of
0.0
RS
T
Fig. 1: Thin-Layer Chromatogram of
Apmrga hydro-alcoholic extract
Loss on drying: not more than 5.0 per cent
(Appendix 2.1.4); Total ash: not more than 10.0
per cent (Appendix 2.1.5); Acid-insoluble ash:
not more than 2.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.7); pH:
4.0-6.5 (Appendix 2.1.10); Total soluble solids:
not less than 90.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.11)
(Method-I)
Other requirements:
Procedure: Inject 20 l of the standard solution

and record the chromatogram. Inject 20 l of the
test solution, record the chromatogram and
measure the response for the analyte peak.
Calculate the content of oleanolic acid in the
substance being examined from the peak response
of analyte. The test is not valid unless the relative
standard deviation for replicate injections is not
more than 2.0 per cent.

(Appendix 3.1); Microbial contamination:
Complies with the prescribed limits, (Appendix
3.2); Pesticide residues: Complies with the
prescribed limits, (Appendix 3.3); Residual
solvent: Complies with the prescribed limits,
Assay:
examined and reflux with 50 per cent methanol
(50 ml x 3) on a water bath for 30 min each, cool
and filter. Combine all the filtrates, concentrate
and transfer to a 100-ml round bottomed flask.
Add 20 ml of 2 M methanolic hydrochloric acid
and reflux at 60-700 on a water bath for 3 hours,
cool and transfer the solution to a separating flask,
extract with chloroform (25 ml x 3). Combine all
the organic extracts and wash gently with water,
pass the combined chloroform extract through
obtained in 5 ml of methanol, transfer to a 10-ml
acid RS in a 100 ml flask and dissolve in 50 ml of
methanol and make up the volume with methanol.
Filter through 0.42 m membrane.
Chromatographic system: High performance
liquid chromatography. Column and stationary
phase: C18 (100 mm x 3.0 mm, 2.5 m). Mobile
phase: Filtered and degassed mixture of 33
volumes of phosphate buffer (prepared by
dissolving 0.14 g of potassium dihydrogen
orthophosphate in 900 ml of water, adding 1 ml
of orthophosphoric acid and making up the
volume to 1000 ml) and 67 volumes of
acetonitrile. Injection volume: 20 l. Flow rate:
0.3 ml per min. Detection: UV 205 nm.

hydro-alcoholic extract with
Oleanolic acid as RS

APMRGA WATER EXTRACT

Apmrga Water Extract is a dried and powdered
extract prepared from Apmrga. The extract
contains not less than 0.01 per cent of oleanolic
acid when assayed.

using the mobile phase : ethyl acetate : toluene :
formic acid (45.0 : 0.5 : 0.1). Dry the plate in air.
Spray the plate with 10 per cent methanolic
Take Apmrga suitably sized (powder or pieces)
in an extractor. Add water, about 3 times the
quantity of raw material and heat at a temperature
between 80-850 for 3-4 hours. Filter the extract
through a filter (preferably 10 m pore size) to a
suitable sized vessel. The marc is extracted three
times more, filtering each time into the same

Rf
1.0
0.5

using oleanolic acid as a reference standard. Test
with 50 per cent methanol (50 ml x 3) for a period
of 30 min each, cool and filter. Combine all the
filtrates, concentrate and transfer to a 100-ml
round bottomed flask. Add 20 ml of 2 M
methanolic hydrochloric acid and reflux at 60-700
on a water bath for 3 hours, cool and transfer the
solution to a separating flask, extract with
chloroform (25 ml x 3). Combine all the organic
extracts and wash gently with water. Pass the
combined chloroform extract through anhydrous
sodium sulphate and evaporate the chloroform
under vacuum. Dissolve the residue obtained in
10 ml of methanol. Standard solution: Dissolve
10 mg of oleanolic acid RS in about 10 ml of
0.0
RS

Apmrga water extract
(Appendix 2.1.4); Total Ash: not more than 25.0
4.5- 6.0 (Appendix 2.1.10); Total soluble solids:
(Method-II)

Calculate the content of oleanolic acid in the
Other requirements:
prescribed limits, (Appendix 3.3); Aflatoxins:
Complies with the prescribed limits, (Appendix 3.4)
Assay:
examined and reflux with 50 per cent methanol
(50 ml x 3) on a water bath for 30 min each, cool
and transfer to a 100 ml round bottomed flask.
Add 20 ml of 2 M methanolic hydrochloric acid
and reflux at 60-700 on a water bath for 3 hours,
cool and transfer the solution to a separating flask,
extract with chloroform (25 ml x 3). Combine all
the organic extracts and wash gently with water,
pass the combined chloroform extract through
obtained in 5 ml of methanol, transfer to a 10 ml
acid RS in a 100-ml volumetric flask and dissolve
in 50 ml of methanol and make up the volume
with methanol. Filter through 0.42 m
membrane. Chromatographic system: High
performance liquid chromatography. Column and
stationary phase: C18 (100 mm x 3.0 mm, 2.5
m). Mobile phase: Filtered and degassed
mixture of 33 volumes of phosphate buffer
(prepared by dissolving 0.14 g of potassium
dihydrogen orthophosphate in 900 ml of water,
adding 1 ml of orthophosphoric acid and making
up the volume to 1000 ml) and 67 volumes of

water extract with Oleanolic acid as RS

ASANA
Asana consists of heart-wood of Pterocarpus
marsupium Roxb. (Fam. Fabaceae); a moderate to
large sized, deciduous tree, upto 30 m high and
2.5 m in girth, with straight clear bole, found
mostly throughout Gujarat, Madhya Pradesh,
Bihar and Orissa. Asana contains not less than
0.25 per cent of pterostilbene when assayed.
c) Powder:
Powder shows vessels with bordered pits, fibre
tracheids, tracheids, fragments of xylem rays and
few crystal fibres, starch absent (Fig. 1).
Synonyms: Bjaka, Ptasra, Asanaka, Bjasra

Other/Regional Language Names:
Assamese: Aajar; Bengali: Piyasala, Pitasala;
English: Indian Kino Tree; Gujarati: Biyo; Hindi:
Vijayasara, Bija; Kannada: Bijasara, Asana;
Kashmiri: Lal chandeur; Malayalam: Venga;
Marathi: Bibala; Oriya: Piashala; Punjabi:
Chandan Lal, Channanlala; Tamil: Vengai;
Telugu: Yegi, Vegisa; Urdu: Bijasar
Description:
a) Macroscopic:
Drug occurs as irregular pieces of variable size
and thickness, golden yellowish brown with
darker streaks, on soaking in water gives yellow
colour solution with blue fluorescence; fracture
strong, tough, very hard, moderately heavy
difficult to break but brittle; taste astringent.
Fig. 1: Powdered drug of ASANA{xe
"ASANA"} (Pterocarpus marsupium
Roxb.)
b) Microscopic:
Transverse section shows alternating bands of
larger and smaller polygonal cells consisting of
tracheids, fibre tracheids, xylem parenchyma and
traversed by xylem rays, numerous xylem vessels
distributed throughout, in singles or in groups of 23, showing tyloses in isolated preparations, vessels
drum or barrel shaped with well-marked perforation
rims and bordered pits, tracheids numerous, long,
thick-walled with tapering ends and simple pits,
fibre tracheids elongated, thick-walled with narrow
lumen and simple pits, xylem parenchyma
rectangular with simple pits, paratracheal
surrounding vessels, xylem rays uni to biseriate, 35-7 cells high, prismatic crystals of calcium oxalate
present in crystal fibres, starch absent

Identification:
using pterostilbene as a reference standard. Test
solution: Extract 1 g of substance by refluxing with
50 ml of methanol for a period of 10-15 min Filter
and concentrate the extract to 25 ml. Standard
solution: Dissolve 10 mg of pterostilbene RS in
about 10 ml of methanol. Procedure: Apply 10 l
9

each of the test and standard solutions as bands at a

height of 10 mm from the base of a 10 x 5 cm TLC
plate and develop up to 8 cm from the base of the
plate using the mobile phase : ethyl acetate : nhexane (5.5 : 4.5).
254 nm
Visible after
derivatisation
Assay:
Rf
1.0
0.5
0.0
RS
RS
Fig. 2: Thin-Layer Chromatogram of Asana

RS: Pterostilbene, T: Test solution
Dry the plate in air and examine under UV 254 nm.
Spray the plate with anisaldehyde - sulphuric acid
reagent and heat at 1050 till the colour of the
spots/bands appear without charring. The
chromatographic profile of the test solution shows a
band corresponding to that of the standard solution
(Fig. 2).
Time
(min)
0.01
5
10
20
25
30
35
12.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.4); Total ash: not more
than 2.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.5); Acid-insoluble
ash: not more than 0.5 per cent (Appendix 2.1.7);
Alcohol-soluble extractive: not less than 7.0 per
cent (Appendix 2.1.8); Water-soluble extractive:
Phosphate buffer
(per cent)
85
45
35
35
45
85
85
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
15
55
65
65
55
15
15
Injection volume: 20 l. Flow rate: 1.5 ml per

min. Detection: UV 320 nm. Procedure: Inject 20
l of the standard solution and record the
record the chromatogram and measure the
Other requirements:
10

examined and reflux with methanol (25 ml x 3)
on water bath for 15 min each, cool and filter.
Combine all the filtrates and transfer to a 100-ml
volumetric flask and make up the volume with
Standard solution: Take about 10 mg, accurately
weighed, pterostilbene RS in a 100 ml volumetric
flask and dissolve in about 50 ml of methanol and
make up the volume with methanol. Filter
through 0.42 m membrane. Chromatographic
system:
High
performance
liquid
C18 (250 mm x 4.6 mm, 5 m). Mobile phase:
Filtered and degassed gradient mixture of
phosphate buffer (prepared by dissolving 0.14 g
of potassium dihydrogen orthophosphate in 500
ml of water, adding 0.5 ml of orthophosphoric
acid and making up the volume to 1000 ml) and
acetonitrile in the following proportions:-
response for the analyte peak. Calculate the

content of pterostilbene in the substance being
examined from the peak response of analyte. The
test is not valid unless the relative standard
deviation for replicate injections is not more than
2.0 per cent.
API Pterostilbene RS
Constituents:
Pterostilbene,
marsupsin,
liquiritigenin,
isoliquiritigenin,
pterosupin,
p-hydroxybenzaldehyde, 7,4'-dihydroxyflavone,
(2R)-3-(p-hydroxyphenyl) lactic acid, propterol,
marsupol, carpusin
Properties and Action: Rasa: Kau, Tikta,

Kaya; Gua: Laghu, Rka; Vrya: ta;
Vipka: Kau; Karma: Kaphamedovioaa,
Keya, Kuhaghna, Raktaodhana, Rasyana,
Stambhana, Tvacya
Important formulations: Asanabilvdi

taila, Nyagrodhdi cra
Therapeutic uses: Pu (anaemia), Prameha

(increased frequency and turbidity of urine)
Fig. 3: HPLC chromatogram of Asana with

Pterostilbene as RS
11
ASANA HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT

Asana Hydro-alcoholic Extract is a dried and

powdered extract prepared from Asana
less than 0.5 per cent of pterostilbene when assayed.
254 nm
Visible after
derivatisation
Method of preparation:
Take Asana suitably sized (powder or pieces) in
an extractor. Add 50 per cent aqueous alcohol,
about 3 times the quantity of raw material and
heat under a reflux at a temperature between 80850 for 3-4 hours. Filter the extract through a filter
(preferably 10 m pore size) to a suitable sized
vessel. The marc is extracted three times more,
filtering the extract each time into the same
1.0
0.5
0.0
RS
RS

hydro-alcoholic extract


with 50 ml of methanol for a period of 10-15 min.
Filter and concentrate the extract to 25 ml.
Standard solution: Dissolve 10 mg of
pterostilbene RS in about 10 ml of methanol.
Procedure: Apply 10 l each of the test and
standard solutions as bands at a height of 10 mm
from the base of a 10 x 5 cm TLC plate and
using the mobile phase : ethyl acetate : n-hexane
(5.5 : 4.5). Dry the plate in air and examine under
UV 254 nm. Spray the plate with anisaldehyde sulphuric acid reagent and heat at 1050 till the

(Appendix 2.1.4); Total ash: not more than 9.0 per
cent (Appendix 2.1.5); Acid-insoluble ash: not
more than 2.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.7); pH: 4.07.0 (Appendix 2.1.10); Total soluble solids: not
less than 85.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.11)
(Method-I)
Other requirements:
12
Rf
Assay:
weighed, pterostilbene RS in a 100-ml volumetric
system:
High
performance
liquid
acetonitrile in the following proportions:Time
(min)
0.01
5
10
20
25
30
35
Phosphate
buffer
(per cent)
85
45
35
35
45
85
85
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatogram of Asana hydroalcoholic extract with Pterostilbene as RS

Acetonitrile
(per cent)
15
55
65
65
55
15
15
Injection volume: 20 l. Flow rate: 1.5 ml per min.

Detection: UV 320 nm. Procedure: Inject 20 l of
the standard solution and record the chromatogram.
Inject 20 l of the test solution, record the
chromatogram and measure the response for the
analyte peak. Calculate the content of pterostilbene
in the substance being examined from the peak
response of analyte. The test is not valid unless the
relative standard deviation for replicate injections is
not more than 2.0 per cent.
13
ASANA WATER EXTRACT

Asana Water Extract is a dried and powdered extract
prepared from Asana. The extract contains not less
than 0.1 per cent of pterostilbene when assayed.
Rf
1.0
Take Asana suitably sized (powder or pieces) in an
extractor. Add water, about 3 times the quantity of
raw material and heat at a temperature between 80850 for 3-4 hours. Filter the extract through a filter
filtering the extract each time into the same vessel.
Concentrate the combined filtrate to a syrupy
consistency and dry under vacuum (between 400600 mm of Hg) at a temperature not exceeding 800
till the moisture is below 5 per cent. Mill the mass
and sieve the powder through 500 m mesh and
pack. The yield obtained is about 8 per cent.
0.5
0.0

water extract

more than 2.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.7); pH: 4.07.0 (Appendix 2.1.10); Total soluble solids: not
(Method-II)
Standard solution: Dissolve 10 mg of
pterostilbene RS in about 10 ml of methanol.
using the mobile phase : ethyl acetate : n-hexane
(5.5 : 4.5). Dry the plate in air and examine under
UV 254 nm. Spray the plate with anisaldehyde
Other requirements:
Heavy metals: Complies with the prescribed
limits,
(Appendix
3.1);
Microbial
contamination: Complies with the prescribed
limits, (Appendix 3.2); Pesticide residues:
3.3); Aflatoxins: Complies with the prescribed
limits, (Appendix 3.4)
Assay:
14
Combine all the filtrates and transfer to a 100 ml

weighed, pterostilbene RS in a 100 ml volumetric
system:
High
performance
liquid
(min)
0.01
5
10
20
25
30
35
Phosphate buffer
(per cent)
85
45
35
35
45
85
85
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatogram of Asana water

extract with Pterostilbene as RS
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
15
55
65
65
55
15
15



content of pterostilbene in the substance being
2.0 per cent.
15
DRUHARIDR
prismatic crystals of calcium oxalate; stone cells also
found scattered in phloem ray cells in groups, rarely
single, mostly elongated, a few rounded; secondary
phloem, a broad zone, consisting of sieve elements
and phloem fibres, traversed by multiseriate phloem
rays; sieve elements arranged in tangential bands and
tangentially compressed cells alternating with single
to five rows of phloem fibres, secondary xylem broad
consisting of xylem vessels, tracheids, xylem fibres
and traversed by multi seriate xylem rays; xylem
vessels numerous, small to medium sized, distributed
throughout xylem region in groups or in singles,
groups of vessels usually arranged radially; isolated
vessels cylindrical with rounded or projected at one or
both ends with spiral thickenings; fibres numerous,
lignified, large, thick-walled with wide lumen, and
pointed tips; xylem rays quite distinct, straight,
multiseriate, consisting of radially arranged
rectangular cells, each ray 30-53 cells high, 8-12 cells
wide, a few ray cells containing brown contents
Druharidr consists of dried stem of Berberis

aristata DC. (Fam. Berberidaceae); an erect,
spinous, deciduous shrub, usually 1.8-3.6 m in
height found in the Himalayan ranges at an
elevation of 1000-3000 m, and in the Nilgiri hills
in south India. Druharidr contains not less than
0.4 per cent of berberine when assayed.
Synonyms: Kaakaer, Drv

Other/Regional Language Names:
Bengali: Daruharidra; English: Indian Berberry;
Gujarati: Daruharidra, Daruhuladur; Hindi:
Daruhaldi, Darhald; Kannada: Maradarishana,
Maradrishina, Daruhaldi; Kashmiri: Ras ashud,
Rasvat; Malayalam: Maramannal, Maramanjal;
Marathi: Daruhalad; Oriya: Daruharidra, Daruhalidi;
Punjabi: Sumalu; Tamil: Gangeti, Varatiu manjal;
Telugu: Manupasupu; Urdu: Darhald
Description:
a) Macroscopic:
Drug available in pieces of variable length and
thickness, bark about 0.4-0.8 cm thick, pale
yellowish-brown, soft, closely and rather deeply
furrowed, rough, brittle, xylem portion yellow,
more or less hard, radiate with xylem rays, pith
mostly absent, when present small, yellowishbrown when dried, fracture short in bark region,
splintery in wood; taste bitter
b) Microscopic:
Stem - Shows rhytidoma with cork consisting of 3-45
rectangular and squarish, yellow coloured, thin-walled
cells, arranged radially; sieve elements irregular in
shape, thin walled, a few cells containing yellowishbrown contents; phloem fibres arranged in tangential
rows, consisting of 1-4 cells, each fibre short thickwalled, spindle-shaped, lignified having wide lumen;
half inner portion of rhytidoma traversed by secondary
phloem rays; phloem rays run obliquely consisting of
radially elongated parenchymatous cells, almost all
phloem ray cells having single prismatic crystals of
calcium oxalate, a few cells of rhytidoma also contain
Fig. 1: Powdered drug of DRUHARIDR

(Berberis aristata DC.)
16
acid : Water (6.5 : 1.5 : 2.0). Dry the plate in air

and examine under UV 366 nm. The
chromatographic profile of the test solution
c) Powder:
Fine powder shows mostly fragments of cork cells,
yellow coloured phloem fibres entire or in pieces,
stone cells in singles or in groups, numerous
prismatic crystals of calcium oxalate, xylem
vessels having spiral thickenings, thick-walled,
lignified xylem fibres and ray cells (Fig. 1)
(Appendix 2.1.9)

Identification:
using berberine chloride as a reference standard.
366 nm
Other requirements:
Rf
1.0

(Appendix3.3); Aflatoxins: Complies with the
0.5
Assay:
methanol. Dilute the solution to match the
standard concentration. Filter through 0.42 m
membrane. Standard solution: Take about 10 mg,
accurately weighed, berberine chloride RS in a
100 ml volumetric flask and dissolve in about 25
ml of methanol and make up the volume with
methanol. Dilute 5 ml of this solution to 25 ml.
phase: Silica CN (250 mm x 4.6 mm, 5 m).
Mobile phase: Filtered and degassed mixture of
0.0
RS
T
Druharidr
RS: Berberine chloride, T: Test solution
Test solution: Extract 0.2 g of substance by
refluxing with 50 ml of methanol for a period of
10-15 min. Filter and concentrate the extract to 25
ml. Standard solution: Dissolve 10 mg of
berberine chloride RS in about 100 ml of
using the mobile phase : n-butanol : glacial acetic
17
35 volumes of acetonitrile and 65 volumes of

water containing 0.3 per cent w/v of
orthophosphoric acid. Injection volume: 20 l.
Flow rate: 1.5 ml per min. Detection: UV 346 nm.
Calculate the content of berberine in the
API Berberine chloride RS
Constituents:
Berberine,
palmatine,
oxyberberine, oxyacanthine, karachine.
Properties and Action: Rasa: Tikta; Gua:

Rka, Laghu; Vrya: Ua; Vipka: Kau;
Karma:
Doapcana,
Stanyaodhana,
Stanyadoahara
Important formulations:
Avagandhdyaria, Bhgarja taila, Jtydi
taila, Khadirdi guika, Khadirria, Triphal
ghta
Therapeutic uses:
mtisra (diarrhoea due to indigestion), Ka
(pruritis), Kapharoga (disease due to kapha doa),
Kararoga (disease of ear), Medoroga (obesity),
Mukharoga (disease of mouth), Netraroga
(disease of eye), Prameha (increased frequency
and turbidity of urine), rustambha (stiffness in
thigh muscles), Vraa (wound)
Fig. 3: HPLC chromatogram of Druharidr

with Berberine chloride as RS
18
DRUHARIDR HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT

366 nm
Druharidr Hydro-alcoholic Extract is a dried and

powdered extract prepared from Druharidr
less than 6 per cent of berberine when assayed.
Rf
1.0
Take Druharidr suitably sized (powder or
pieces) in an extractor. Add 50 per cent aqueous
and heat under a reflux at a temperature between
exceeding 800 till the moisture is below 5.0 per
0.5
0.0
RS
T
Druharidr hydro-alcoholic extract
RS: Berberine chloride T: Test solution
cent (Appendix 2.1.5); Acid-insoluble ash: not more
than 2.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.7); pH: 6.0-8.0
(Appendix 2.1.10); Total soluble solids: not less
than 90.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.11) (Method-I)

using the mobile phase: n-butanol : glacial acetic
Other requirements:
limits, (Appendix 3.1); Microbial contamination:
solvent: Complies with the Prescribed limits,
Assay:
19

100-ml volumetric flask and dissolve in about 25


hydro-alcoholic extract with Berberine
chloride as RS
20
DRUHARIDRWATER EXTRACT
366 nm
Druharidr Water Extract is a dried and

powdered extract prepared from Druharidr.
The extract contains not less than 4 per cent of
berberine when assayed.
Rf
1.0
Take Druharidr suitably sized (powder or
pieces) in an extractor. Add water, about 3 times
the quantity of raw material and heat at a
temperature between 80-850 for 3-4 hours. Filter
the extract through a filter (preferably 10 m pore
size) to a suitable sized vessel. The marc is
extracted three times more, filtering the extract
each time into the same vessel. Concentrate the
combined filtrate to a syrupy consistency and dry
under vacuum (between 400-600 mm of Hg) at a
temperature not exceeding 800 till the moisture is
below 5.0 per cent. Mill the mass and sieve the
powder through 500 m mesh and pack. The
0.5
0.0
RS
T
Druharidr water extract
RS: Berberine chloride, T: Test solution
(Method-II)

using the mobile phase : n-butanol : glacial acetic
Other requirements:
Assay:
Combine all the filtrates and transfer to a 100 ml
21

substance being examined from the peak
response of analyte. The test is not valid unless
the relative standard deviation for replicate
injections is not more than 2.0 per cent.

Flow rate: 1.5 ml per min. Detection: UV
346
nm. Procedure: Inject 20 l of the standard
solution and record the chromatogram. Inject 20
l of the test solution, record the chromatogram
and measure the response for the analyte peak.


water extract with Berberine chloride as RS
22
DHR VKMLA
c) Powder:
Dhr Vkmla consists of dried fruit of

Garcinia gummi-gutta (L.) Rob. syn. Garcinia
cambogia (Gaertn.) Desr. (Fam. Clusiaceae); a
small tree, common in evergreen forests of
Western ghats, from Konkan southwards to
Travancore, and in the Shola forests of the
Nilgiris up to an altitude of 1800 m. Dhr
Vkmla contains not less than 5 per cent of
hydroxycitric acid and not less than 5 per cent of
lactone when assayed.
Shows isolated cells of mesocarp, containing dark

reddish brown gummy exudates, prismatic
crystals of calcium oxalate and starch grains;
fragments of longitudinally cut spiral and annular
vessels (Fig. 1)
Synonym: KrVkmla
Regional Language Names: English: Malabar
Tamarind, Kokum, Butter Tree; Gujarati: Kokam,
Kokan; Hindi: Kokam; Kannada: Murgin huli,
Murgala; Malayalam: Panampuli; Marathi:
Kokam, Ratamba, Amsol, Amsul, Ratambi;
Oriya: Raktasrava; Tamil: Kodukkappuli;
Telugu: Vrksamta, Simachinta
Description:
a) Macroscopic:
Fig. 1: Powdered drug of Dhr Vkmla

(Garcinia gummi-gutta (L.) Rob.)
Fruits are ovoid, yellow or red when ripe and become

black when dried. 6-8 grooves are seen up to the
middle. Dried pieces of drug consists of longitudinal
fragments of pericarp of various size and shapes
strongly inwardly curved, boat or half moon shaped,
dark brownish black, wrinkled irregularly and
internally smooth. Odour characteristic, taste sour,
astringent and slightly bitter

Identification:
High performance liquid chromatography:
Carry out liquid chromatography (Appendix 3.6)
using (-)-hydroxycitric acid lactone and calcium
(-)-hydroxycitrate as a reference standards. Test
solution, Standard solution, Chromatographic
system, Mobile phase, Injection volume,
Detection and Procedure follow as mentioned
under Assay. The chromatogram obtained with
test solution shows peaks corresponding to the
retention time of (-)-hydroxycitric acid lactone
and (-)-hydroxycitric acid (Fig. 2).
b) Microscopic:
TS of pericarp shows a layer of epicarp, composed
of rectangular to tangentially elongated cells
covered externally with thin cuticle; mesocarp very
wide composed of 100 to 150 rows of
parenchymatous cells of various size and shape
which possess simple and compound starch grains
and prismatic crystals of calcium oxalate; vascular
bundles consists of phloem and xylem with spiral
vessels, rectangular to irregular shaped parenchyma
cells, traversing throughout the mesocarp but more
prominently in inner zone of pericarp
23

not less than 35 per cent (Appendix 2.1.9)
acid in the substance being examined from the peak

response of analytes. The test is not valid unless the
Other requirements:
Dhr Vkmla
Assay:
(Appendix 3.6). Test solution: Take about 0.5 g,
accurately weighed, of the substance being examined
and reflux with 25 ml of water (adjusted to pH 2.1 with
sulphuric acid solution) on a water bath for 10 min and
transfer to a 50-ml volumetric flask. Cool, filter and
make up the volume with water (adjusted to pH 2.1
with sulphuric acid solution). Filter through 0.42 m
accurately weighed, (-)-hydroxycitric acid lactone RS
and 50 mg of calcium (-)-hydroxycitrate RS in a 25ml volumetric flask and dissolve in about 10 ml of
water (adjusted to pH 2.1 with sulphuric acid solution)
and make up the volume with water (adjusted to pH
2.1 with sulphuric acid solution). Filter through 0.42
m membrane. Chromatographic system: High
stationary phase: C18 (250 mm x 4.6 mm, 5 m).
Mobile phase: Filtered and degassed 0.05 M sodium
sulphate in water (adjusted to pH 2.3 with sulphuric
acid solution). Injection volume: 20 l. Flow rate: 1.0
ml per min. Detection: UV 210 nm. Procedure: Inject
20 l of the standard solution and record the
chromatogram. Inject 20 l of the test solution, record
the chromatogram and measure the response for the
analyte peaks, identify the analyte peak using relative
retention time. The relative retention time for (-)hydroxycitric acid lactone is 1 and for (-)hydroxycitric acid is about 1.1. Calculate the contents
of (-)-hydroxycitric acid lactone and (-)-hydroxycitric
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatograms of Dhr

Vkmla with (-)-Hydroxycitric acid lactone
and Calcium (-)-hydroxycitrate as RS
API reference standards:

API (-)-Hydroxycitric acid lactone RS and
Calcium (-)-hydroxycitrate RS
Constituents:
(-)-Hydroxycitric
acid,
(-)- hydroxycitric acid lactone, citric acid, tartaric
acid
Properties and Action: Rasa: Amla; Gua:

Laghu, Rka; Vrya: Ua; Vipka: Amla;
Karma: Aroghna, Dpana, Kapha-vtahara,
Rucya, Sandhnya, laghna, Tnigrahaa
Therapeutic uses: Agnimndya (digestive

impairment), Ara (piles), Gulma (abdominal
lump), la (pain), Vibandha (constipation)

24
DHR VKMLA HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT

Dhr Vkmla Hydro-alcoholic Extract is a
dried and powdered extract prepared from Dhr
Vkmla (appropriately powdered). The extract
contains not less than 3 per cent of (-)hydroxycitric acid and not less than 14 per cent of
(-)-hydroxycitric acid lactone when assayed.
Other requirements:
prescribed limits, (Appendix3.3); Residual
Take Dhr Vkmla (Powder) in an extractor.
Add 50 per cent aqueous alcohol, about 3 times the
quantity of raw material and heat under reflux at a
the extract through an appropriate filter (preferably
10 m pore size) to a suitable sized vessel. The
marc is extracted three times more, filtering the
extract each time into the same vessel. Concentrate
the combined filtrate to a syrupy consistency and
dry under vacuum (between 400-600 mm of Hg) at
80 till the moisture is less than 7 per cent. Mill the
mass and sieve the powder through 500 m mesh
to obtain the extract and pack. The yield obtained
is about 38 per cent.
Assay:
examined and reflux with 25 ml of water
(adjusted to pH 2.1 with sulphuric acid solution)
on a water bath for 10 min and transfer to a 50-ml
volumetric flask. Cool, filter and make up the
volume with water (adjusted to pH 2.1 with
sulphuric acid solution). Filter through 0.42 m
accurately weighed, (-)-hydroxycitric acid
lactone RS and 50 mg of calcium (-)hydroxycitrate RS in a 25-ml volumetric flask and
dissolve in about 10 ml of water (adjusted to pH
2.1 with sulphuric acid solution) and make up the
Mobile phase: Filtered and degassed 0.05 M
sodium sulphate in water (adjusted to pH 2.3 with
sulphuric acid solution). Injection volume: 20 l.
measure the response for the analyte peaks,
identify the analyte peak using relative retention
time. The relative retention time for (-)hydroxycitric acid lactone is 1 and for (-)-

(Appendix 2.1.4); Total Ash: not more than 7.0 per
25
hydroxycitric acid is about 1.1. Calculate the

contents of (-)-hydroxycitric acid lactone and
(-)-hydroxycitric acid in the substance being
examined from the peak response of analytes. The
2.0 per cent.


Dhr Vkmla Hydro-alcoholic extract

Vkmla hydro-alcoholic extract with
(-)-Hydroxycitric acid lactone
and Calcium (-)-hydroxycitrate as RS
26
DHR VKMLA WATER EXTRACT

Dhr Vkmla Water Extract is a dried and
powdered extract prepared from Dhr Vkmla.
The extract contains not less than 6 per cent of (-)hydroxycitric acid and not less than 20 per cent of
(-)-hydroxycitric acid lactone when assayed.
Other requirements:
Take Dhr Vkmla (Powder) in an extractor.
Add water, about 3 times the quantity of raw
material and heat under reflux at a temperature
through an appropriate filter (preferably 10 m
pore size) to a suitable sized vessel. The marc is
under vacuum (between 400-600 mm of Hg) at
80 till the moisture is less than 7 per cent. Mill
the mass and sieve the powder through 500 m
mesh to obtain the extract and pack. The yield
obtained is about 38 per cent.
Assay:
examined and reflux with 25 ml of water
(adjusted to pH 2.1 with sulphuric acid solution)
on a water bath for 10 min and transfer to a 50-ml
volumetric flask. Cool, filter and make up the
accurately weighed, (-)-hydroxycitric acid
lactone RS and 50 mg of calcium (-)hydroxycitrate RS in a 25-ml volumetric flask and
dissolve in about 10 ml of water (adjusted to pH
2.1 with sulphuric acid solution) and make up the
Mobile phase: Filtered and degassed 0.05 M
sodium sulphate in water (adjusted to pH 2.3 with
sulphuric acid solution). Injection volume: 20 l.
measure the response for the analyte peaks,
identify the analyte peak using relative retention
time. The relative retention time for (-)hydroxycitric acid lactone is 1 and for (-)hydroxycitric acid is about 1.1. Calculate the
contents of (-)-hydroxycitric acid lactone and (-)-

than 90.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.11) (Method-II)
27
hydroxycitric acid in the substance being

examined from the peak response of analytes. The
2.0 per cent.


Dhr Vkmla Water extract

Vkmla water extract with
(-)-Hydroxycitric acid lactone and Calcium
(-)-hydroxycitrate as RS
28
KAUK
vascular bundles surrounded by single layered
endodermis of thick walled cells; secondary phloem
composed of phloem parenchyma and a few
scattered fibres; cambium 2-4 layered; secondary
xylem consists of vessels, tracheids, xylem fibres
and xylem parenchyma, vessels vary in shape and
size having transverse oblique articulation;
tracheids long, parenchyma thin walled and
polygonal in shape; centre occupied by a small pith
consisting of thin-walled cells; simple round to oval,
starch grains abundantly found in all cells
Kauk consists of the dried rhizome with root of

Picrorrhiza kurroa Royle ex Benth. (Fam.
Scrophulariaceae); a perennial, more or less hairy
herb common on the north-western Himalayas
from Kashmir to Sikkim. Rhizome is cut into
small pieces. It contains not less than 6.0 per cent
of bitters and not less than 4.0 per cent of sum of
picroside I and picroside II when assayed.
Synonyms: Tikt, Tiktarohi, Kaurohi,

Kav, Matsyaakal
Other/Regional
Language
Names:
Root - Young root shows single layered epidermis,

some epidermal cells elongate forming unicellular
hairs; hypodermis single layered; cortex 8-14
layered; consisting of oval to polygonal, thickwalled, parenchymatous cells; primary stele tetrach
to heptarch, enclosed by single layered pericycle
and single layered, thick-walled cells of
endodermis; mature root shows 4-15 layers of cork,
1-2 layers of cork cambium; secondary phloem
poorly developed; secondary xylem consisting of
vessels, tracheids, parenchyma and fibres; vessels
have varying shape and size, some cylindrical with
tail-like, tapering ends, some drum shaped with
perforation on end walls or lateral walls; tracheids
cylindrical with tapering pointed ends; fibres
aseptate, thick walled, lignified with tapering, blunt,
chiesel-like pointed ends.
Assamese: Katki, Kutki; English: Hellebore;

Gujarati: Kadu, Katu; Hindi: Kutki; Kannada:
Katukarohini;
Malayalam:
Katukurohini,
Katurohini; Marathi: Kutki, Kali kutki; Oriya:
Katuki; Punjabi: Karru, Kaur; Tamil:
Kadugurohini; Telugu: Katukarohini, Katki
Description:
a) Macroscopic:
Rhizome - 2.5 cm long and 4-8 mm thick,
subcylindrical, straight or slightly curved,
externally greyish-brown, surface rough due to
longitudinal wrinkles, circular scars of roots and
bud scales and sometimes roots attached; tip ends
in a growing bud surrounded by tufted crown of
leaves; at places cork exfoliates exposing dark
cortex; fracture short; odour pleasant; taste bitter
Root - Thin, cylindrical, 5-10 cm long, 0.05-0.1
cm in diameter, straight or slightly curved with a
few longitudinal wrinkles and dotted scars,
mostly attached with rhizomes, dusty grey,
fracture short, inner surface black with whitish
xylem; odour pleasant; taste bitter
b) Microscopic:
Rhizome- Shows 20-25 layers of cork consisting of
tangentially elongated, suberised cells; cork
cambium 1-2 layered; cortex single layered or
absent, primary cortex persists in some cases, one or
two small vascular bundles present in cortex;
Fig. 1: Powdered drug of KAUK

(Picrorrhiza kurroa Royle ex Benth.)
29
plate with 10 per cent methanolic sulphuric acid

shows bands corresponding to that of the standard
solution (Fig. 2).
c) Powder:
Powder dusty grey, shows group of fragments of
cork cells, thick walled parenchyma, pitted
vessels and single round to oval starch grains
(Fig. 1)
Identification:

silica gel 60F254 plate Appendix 3.5) using picrosideI and picroside-II as reference standards.
254 nm
Visible after
derivatisation
Rf
1.0
Other requirements:
0.5
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Assay of bitters:
Carry out the assay by Gravimetry. Take about 2
g, accurately weighed, of the substance being
on water bath for one hour each, cool and filter.
Combine all the filtrates, concentrate and
evaporate to dryness under reduced pressure.
Dissolve the residue in hot water and filter.
Extract the filtrate repeatedly with 50, 50, 50, 25,
25 ml of ethyl acetate. Combine all the ethyl
acetate extracts and filter and evaporate to
dryness under reduced pressure. Dry the residue
at 1000 for one hour and weigh the residue.
Calculate the content of bitters from the weight of
the residue and from the weight of substance
taken for the test.
0.0
RS
T
RS
T
Fig. 2: Thin-Layer Chromatogram of Kauk
RS: (1) Picroside-I and (2) Picroside-II,
T: Test solution
Test solution: Extract 1 g of substance by refluxing
Filter and concentrate the extract to 25 ml. Standard
solution: Dissolve 5 mg each of picroside-I RS and
picroside-II RS in 25 ml of methanol. Procedure:
Apply 10 l each of the test and standard solutions as
bands at a height of 10 mm from the base of a 10 x 5
cm TLC plate and develop up to 8 cm from the base
of the plate using the mobile phase: ethyl acetate :
methanol : water (82.0 : 10.0 : 8.0). Dry the plate in
air and examine under UV 254 nm. Spray the
Assay:
30

examined and reflux with water (25 ml x 3) on a
water bath for 15 min each, cool and filter.
Combine all the filtrates, concentrate and transfer
to a 100-ml volumetric flask and make up the
volume with water. Filter through 0.42 m
accurately weighed, each of picroside-I RS and
picroside-II RS in 25 ml volumetric flask and
dissolve in about 20 ml of water and make up the
water containing 0.1 per cent phosphoric acid.
Injection volume: 20 l. Flow rate: 1 ml per min.
Detector: UV 262 nm. Procedure: Inject 20 l of
the standard solution and record the
responses for the analyte peaks.
Analyte
Picroside-II
Picroside-I
Calculate the content of picroside-I and picrosideII in the substance being examined from peak
response of analytes. The test is not valid unless

API Picroside-I RS and Picroside-II RS
Constituents: Picrosides I, II and III, pikuroside,

kutkoside, cucurbitacins, cucurbitacin glycosides,
apocynin, androsin, picein, vanillic acid,
veronicoside, minecoside, 6-feruloylcatalpol

Laghu; Vrya: ta; Vipka: Kau; Karma:
Bhedin, Dpana, mapacan, Gulmaghn,
Jvarahara, Kaghna, Lekhanya, Pittahara,
Stanyaodhana, lahara, lemahara, Viaghna
Relative retention time

1.0
2.5
Important formulations: rogyavardhin

guik, Mahtikataka ghta, Sarvajvarahara
lauha, Tiktaka ghta
Therapeutic uses: Dha (burning sensation),

majavara (fever due to indigestion), mavta
(rheumatism), Jvara (fever), Kmal (Jaundice),
Kuha (diseases of skin), Plhodara
(splenomegaly), Sthaulya (obesity), vsa
(dyspnoea), Viamajvara (intermittent fever),
Vraa (wound), Yakdotha (hepatitis)

Fig. 3: HPLC chromatogram of Kauk with
Picroside-I and Picroside-II as RS
31
KAUK HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT

chromatographic profile of the test solution shows
bands corresponding to that of the standard solution
(Fig. 1).
254 nm
Visible after
derivatisation
Rf
1.0
Kauk Hydro-alcoholic Extract is a dried and

powdered extract prepared from Kauk
(appropriately powdered). The extract contains
not less than 6 per cent of bitters and not less than
1 per cent of sum of picroside-I and picroside-II
when assayed.
Take Kauk suitably sized (powder or pieces) in
0.5
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(2)
0.0
RS T
RS T
Kauk hydro-alcoholic extract
T: Test solution

more than 1.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.7); pH: 4.06.0 (Appendix 2.1.10); Total soluble olids: not
(Method-I)

silica gel 60F254 plate (Appendix 3.5) using picrosideI and picroside-II as reference standards. Test solution:
Extract 1 g of substance by refluxing with 50 ml of
methanol for a period of 10-15 min. Filter and
concentrate the extract to 25 ml. Standard solution:
Dissolve 5 mg each of picroside-I RS and picroside-II
RS in 25 ml of methanol. Procedure: Apply 10 l each
of the test and standard solutions as bands at a height
of 10 mm from the base of a 10 x 5 cm TLC plate and
develop up to 8 cm from the base of the plate using the
mobile phase: ethyl acetate : methanol : water (82.0 :
10.0 : 8.0). Dry the plate in air and examine under UV
254 nm. Spray the plate with 10 per cent methanolic
sulphuric acid reagent and heat at 1050 till the colour
of the spots/bands appear without charring. The
Other requirements:
32
Analyte
Picroside-II
Picroside-I
Assay of bitters:
Carry out the assay by Gravimetry. Take about
2 g, accurately weighed, of the substance being
examined, and reflux with methanol (50 ml x 3)
taken for the test.

1.0
2.5
Assay:
picroside-II RS in 25-ml volumetric flask and
min. Detector: UV 262 nm. Procedure: Inject 20
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatograms of Kauk

hydro-alcoholic extract with Picroside-I and
Picroside-II as RS

33
KAUK WATER EXTRACT

Kauk Water Extract is dried and powdered
extract prepared from Kauk. The extract
contains not less than 8 per cent of bitters and not
less than 5 per cent of sum of picroside-I and
picroside-II when assayed.

solution shows bands corresponding to that of the
254 nm
Visible after
derivatisation
Take Kauk suitably sized (powder or pieces) in
an extractor. Add water, about 3 times the
times more, filtering the extract each time into the
same vessel. Concentrate the combined filtrate to
a syrupy consistency and dry under vacuum
(between 400-600 mm of Hg) at a temperature
not exceeding 800 till the moisture is below 5 per
500 m mesh and pack. The yield obtained is
about 20 per cent.
0.5
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
0.0
RS
T
RS T
Kauk water extract
T: Test solution
Loss on drying: not more than 7.0 per cent (Appendix

2.1.4); Total ash: not more than 5.0 per cent
(Appendix 2.1.5); Acid-insoluble ash: not more than
1.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.7); pH: 4.0-7.0 (Appendix
2.1.10); Total soluble solids: not less than 90.0 per
cent (Appendix 2.1.11) (Method-II)

using picroside-I and picroside-II as reference
standards. Test solution: Extract 1 g of substance
by refluxing with 50 ml of methanol for a period
of 10-15 min. Filter and concentrate the extract to
25 ml. Standard solution: Dissolve 5 mg each of
picroside-I RS and picroside-II RS in 25 ml of
develop up to 8 cm from the base of the plate using
the mobile phase: ethyl acetate: methanol : water
(82.0 : 10.0 : 8.0). Dry the plate in air and examine
under UV 254 nm. Spray the plate with 10 per cent
methanolic sulphuric acid reagent and heat at 1050
till the colour of the spots/bands appear without
Other requirements:
Assay of bitters:
34
Rf
1.0
examined, and reflux with methanol (50 ml x 3)

taken for the test.
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatograms of Kauk

water extract with Picroside- I and
Picroside-II as RS
Assay:
picroside-II RS in 25-ml volumetric flask and
Detector: UV 262 nm. Procedure: Inject 20 l of
Analyte
Picroside-II
Picroside-I


1.0
2.5
35
MAJIH
Maji consists of the dried root of Rubia
cordifolia L. (Fam. Rubiaceae), a perennial
herbaceous creeper or climber, with hooked
prickles and whorls of four leaves, but without
interpetiolar stipules, found throughout the
country ascending to 3750 m. It contains not less
than 0.04 per cent of rubiadin when assayed.
Synonyms:
Yojanavall,
Vastrarajin, Rakt
Medullary rays are uni- to multiseriate and oval

to circular starch grains present in cortical and
phloem parenchyma cells.
c) Powder:
Shows numerous fragments of cork, lignified
xylem vessels, tracheids and fibres, raphides,
clusters and sandy oxalate crystals, parenchyma
with red content and starch grains (Fig. 1)
Tmravall,
Other/Regional Language Names: Assamese:

Phuvva; Bengali: Manjishtha, Manjith; English:
Indian Madder; Gujarati: Manjitha; Hindi:
Manjitha, Manjit; Kannada: Manjustha;
Malayalam: Manjatti, Manchatti; Marathi:
Manjishtha; Punjabi: Manjistha, Manjit; Tamil:
Manatte, Manjitti; Telugu: Manjishtha
Description:
a) Macroscopic:
Root - Cylindrical, often surmounted by a knotty
crown of root stock; about 2 to 9 cm in length and
0.2 to 0.6 cm in width; surface smooth finely
striated longitudinally and occasionally grooved,
often exhibiting lateral root scars; dark reddish
brown both externally and internally. Fracture
short, taste sweetish, acrid and disagreeable,
odour pleasant
Fig. 1: Powdered drug of MAJI

(Rubia cordifolia L.)
b) Microscopic:
TS of root shows a well developed cork,
consisting of 3 to 8 layered suberized radially
arranged cells, occasionally filled with reddish
brown content, followed by a cortex of 3 to 10 cell
layers; some cortical cells filled with acicular and
sandy crystals of calcium oxalate more towards
periphery. Phloem 8 to 12 layers wide, consists of
sieve tubes, companion cells and phloem
parenchyma. Xylem consists of vessels, fibres,
tracheids and xylem parenchyma. Vessels are
broader towards the peripheral region of the
xylem. The size of vessels vary from 30 to 270
m in length and 18 to 90 m in breadth.

Identification:
using rubiadin as a reference standard. Test
with chloroform (25 ml x 3) for a period of 10-15
min each. Filter and concentrate the combined
extract to dryness. Dissolve the residue in 2 ml of
36
Other requirements:

rubiadin RS in about 10 ml of methanol.
254 nm

366 nm
Rf
1.0
Assay:
on water bath for 5-10 min each, cool and Filter.
Combine all the filtrates, concentrate to 50 ml and
transfer in a 100-ml volumetric flask and make up
the volume with methanol. Filter through 0.42 m
accurately weighed, rubiadin RS in a 100-ml
volumetric flask and dissolve in about 50 ml of
phase: C18 (250 mm x 4.6 mm, 5 m). Mobile
phase: Filtered and degassed gradient mixture of
acetonitrile in the following proportions:
0.5
0.0
RS
T
RS
T
Majih
RS: Rubiadin, T: Test solution
develop upto 8 cm from the base of the plate using
the mobile phase: toluene : ethyl acetate :
chloroform : glacial acetic acid (10.0 : 5.0 : 1.0 :
2.5). Dry the plate in air and examine under UV
254 nm and under UV 366 nm. The
shows a band corresponding to that of standard
solution (Fig.2).
Time
(min)
0.01
5
15
20
25
30
(Appendix 2.1.9)
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
35
50
80
85
35
35

37
Phosphate buffer
(per cent)
65
50
20
15
65
65

content of rubiadin in the substance being
2.0 per cent.
dihydroxy-2methylanthraquinone,
1,5- dihydroxy-2-methylanthraquinone, 3-prenyl5-methoxy-1,4- napthoquinone, 1-hydroxy-2methoxyanthraquinone, 1,4-dihydroxy-2-methyl5-(or 8)-methoxyanthraquinone, 1,3- dimethoxy2-carboxyanthraquinone
Properties and Action: Rasa: Kaya, Tikta,

Madhura; Gua: Laghu, Rka; Vrya: ta;
Vipka: Kau; Karma: Pittasaamana,
Sandhnya, Varya, Vraaropa
Important formulations: Methikdi cra,

Palapupsava, Yogarjsava
Therapeutic
Garbhapta (abortion), Pakvtisra (chronic

diarrhoea), Tvakroga (skin disease), Vraa
(wound), Vyaga (dark shade on face due to
stress and excessive exercise)
Fig. 3: HPLC chromatogram of Majih

with Rubiadin as RS
Dose: 3-6 g
API references standard:

API Rubiadin RS
Constituents: Rubiadin, anthraquinones,

alizarin, purpurin, purpuroxanthin, ruberythric
acid,
1,3-dihydroxy-2-ethoxymethyl-9,10nthraquinone, lucidin primeveroside, 2-methyl1,3,6-trihydroxy-9,10-anthraquinone 3-O- (6-O-rhamnosyl(12)--glucoside,
acetyl)furomollugin, rubilactone, 2-carboxymethyl-3prenyl-2,3-epoxy-1, 4-naphthoquinone, 1hydroxy-2-hydroxymethyl-9,10-anthraquinone,
2-methyl-1,3,6-trihydroxy-9,10-anthraquinone,
rubioncolin
B,
1-hydroxy-2-methyl
anthraquinone, nordamnacanthal, physcion, 1,4dihydroxy-6-methylanthraquinone,
1,438
uses: Bhagna (fracture),
MAJIH HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT

solution (Fig. 1).
Majih Hydro-alcoholic Extract is a dried and

powdered extract prepared from Majih
not less than 0.05 per cent of rubiadin when
assayed.
254 nm
366 nm
Rf
1.0
Take Majih suitably sized (powder or pieces)
in an extractor. Add 50.0 per cent aqueous
and heat under reflux at a temperature between
0.5
0.0
RS
T
RS T
Majih hydro-alcoholic extract

(Method-I)
extract to dryness. Dissolve the residue in 2 ml of
the mobile phase: toluene : ethyl acetate :
Other requirements:
Assay:
39

on water bath for 5-10 min each, cool and filter.
transfer in a 100 ml volumetric flask and make up
Time
(min)
0.01
5
15
20
25
30
Phosphate buffer
(per cent)
65
50
20
15
65
65

hydro-alcoholic extract with Rubiadin as RS
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
35
50
80
85
35
35

API Rubiadin RS

2.0 per cent.
40
MAJIH WATER EXTRACT

254 nm
Majih Water Extract is a dried and powdered

extract prepared from Majih. The extract
contains not less than 0.02 per cent of rubiadin
when assayed.
366 nm
Rf
1.0
Take Majih suitably sized (powder or pieces)
0.5
0.0
RS
T
RS
T
Majih water extract
Loss on drying: not more than 7.0 per cent,
(Method-II)

extract to dryness.Dissolve the residue in 2 ml of
the mobile phase:toluene : ethyl acetate :
solution (Fig. 1).
Other requirements:
Assay:
on water bath for 5-10 min each, cool and filter.
41
transfer in a 100-ml volumetric flask and make up

Time
(min)
0.01
5
15
20
25
30
Phosphate buffer
(per cent)
65
50
20
15
65
65

water extract with Rubiadin as RS
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
35
50
80
85
35
35


API Rubiadin RS

2.0 per cent.
42
MEAG
Meag consists of dried leaf of Gymnema
sylvestre R.Br. (Fam. Asclepiadaceae), a large
woody, much branched, climber, with pubescent
young parts, found throughout India in dry forests
upto 600 m. It contains not less than 8.0 per cent
of gymnemic acids and not less than 2.0 per cent
of gymnemagenin when assayed.
conjoint and situated in centre; rest of the tissue

between collenchyma and vascular bundles
consisting
of
polygonal
thin-walled
parenchymatous cells with intercellular spaces, a
few having rosette crystals of calcium oxalate
Lamina - Cuticle striated shows dorsiventral
structure; epidermis with cells having beaded walls
and trichome as in petiole and midrib; trichome
consists of 3 to 6 cells nearly similar in width and
variable in length, terminal cells blunt, most of
them curved inwards from the leaf surface;
palisade 1 or 2 layers; spongy parenchyma
irregular, arranged with distinct intercellular
spaces, rosette crystals of calcium oxalate present
in this region; stomata paracytic, present only on
lower surface; palisade ratio 7 or 8; stomatal index
20 to 25, and vein islet number 7 to 10
Synonyms: Madhunin
Other/Regional Language Names: Bengali:
Medhasingi; English: Periploca of the Woods;
Gujarati: Kaavalee, Medhasinge; Hindi: Gudmaar,
Medhasingi; Kannada: Kadhasige; Malayalam:
Cakkarakkolli,
Madhunaashini;
Marathi:
Kaavalee, Medhashingi; Tamil: Sirukurunjan,
Shakkaraikkolli; Telugu: Padapatri
Description:
a) Macroscopic:
Leaf simple, opposite, elliptical or ovate,
petiolate, petiole 6 to 12 mm long and pubescent;
lamina 3 to 6 cm long and 1 to 3 cm broad; acute
or shortly acuminate; more or less pubescent on
both sides, base rounded or cordate, venation
reticulate; odour unpleasant; taste bitter and acrid,
and leaves a benumbing sensation
b) Microscopic:
Leaf - Petiole Nearly semi-circular in outline
having a deep furrow, shows a single layered
epidermis covered with thick cuticle;
multicellular uniseriate trichomes present; cortex
composed of 3 or 4 layers of collenchyma and 3
or 4 layers of thin walled parenchymatous cells
with intercellular spaces; vascular bundle
bicollateral, conjoint and 3 in number, one central
larger and crescent shaped and 2 lateral and
smaller in size; a few rosette crystals of calcium
oxalate present in cortical region
Midrib Epidermis and trichome as in petiole;
epidermis followed by 2 or 3 layers of
collenchyma adjacent to the lower surface;
vascular bundle crescent shaped, bicollateral,
Fig. 1: Powdered drug of MEAG

(Gymnema sylvestre R.Br.)
43

solutions as bands at a height of 10 mm from the base
of a 10 x 5 cm TLC plate and develop up to 8 cm
from the base of the plate using the mobile phase:
ethyl acetate : methanol : formic acid (82.0 : 10.0 :
8.0). Dry the plate in air. Spray the plate with 10 per
cent methanolic sulphuric acid reagent and heat at
1050 till the colour of the spots/bands appear without
c) Powder:
Light yellow; shows polygonal, thin walled
parenchymatous cells, simple pitted fibres and
vessels; laticiferous vessels embedded with
granular contents, large and a few small rosette
crystals of calcium oxalate, simple and compound
starch grains, measuring 5 to 11 in dia (Fig. 1)

Identification:

silica gel 60F254 plate (Appendix 3.5) using
gymnemagenin as a reference standard. Test
solution: Extract 0.5 g of substance by refluxing with
a mixture of 50 per cent methanol and 11 per cent
potassium hydroxide solution (10 : 2), for a period of
1 hour. Add 1.8 ml of concentrated hydrochloric acid
and reflux again for one hour on water bath. Cool and
adjust the pH between 7.5 to 8.5 with 11 per cent
potassium hydroxide solution. Dilute to 50 ml with
50 per cent of methanol and filter. Standard solution:
Dissolve 10 mg of gymnemagenin RS in 10 ml of
methanol.

Other requirements:
Visible after derivatization

Rf
1.0
Assay of gymnemic acids:

examined, in a100-ml round bottomed flask;
reflux with 0.1 N sodium hydroxide solution (25
ml x 3) on a water bath for 10 min each. Cool and
centrifuge, collect all the supernatants,
concentrate to 25 ml and add dilute sulphuric acid
drop wise till precipitate is completed. Centrifuge
and wash the residue with cold water till the
residue is acid free. Dissolve the residue in 50 ml
of methanol and evaporate to dryness under
reduced pressure. Dry the residue at 1050 for one
hour and weigh the residue. Calculate the content
of gymnemic acids from the weight of the residue.
0.5
0.0
RS
T
Fig. 2: Thin-Layer Chromatogram ofMeag
RS: Gymnemagenin, T: Test solution
44
Assay:
examined, add 10 ml of 50 per cent methanol and
2 ml of 11 per cent potassium hydroxide solution,
reflux for one hour on a water bath, cool and add
1.8 ml of concentrated hydrochloric acid and again
reflux for one hour on a water bath. Cool and adjust
pH between 7.5 to 8.5 with 11 per cent potassium
hydroxide solution and make up the volume to 100
ml with 50 per cent methanol. Take 20 ml of this
solution add 400 mg of polyamide (C-200), stir for
one hour and filter the supernatant. Filter through
0.42 m membrane. Standard solution: Take about
10 mg, accurately weighed, gymnemagenin RS in a
50 ml volumetric flask and dissolve in about 25 ml
of 50 per cent methanol and make up the volume
with 50 per cent methanol. Filter through 0.42 m
Mobile phase: Filtered and degassed gradient
mixture of acetonitrile and water containing 0.1 per
cent of orthophosphoric acid in the following
proportions:-
Meag
Fig. 3: HPLC chromatogram of Meang

with Gymnemagenin as RS

API Gymnemagenin RS
Constituents: Triterpenoid
saponins of
gymnemic acid A, B, C and D with sugar residues
such as glucuronic acid, galacturonic acid, ferulic
and angelic acids attached as carboxylic acids.
Several
isopropylene
derivatives
of
gymnemagenin,
a
hexahydroterpene,
gymnemagenin, gymnemic acid. The leaves also
contain betaine, choline, gymnamine alkaloids,
inositol, d-quercitol. Hydrocarbons such as
nonacosane,
hentriacontane,
tritriacontane,
pentatriacontane, phytin, resin, tartaric acid, formic
acid, butyric acid, -butyric acid, amino acids such
as leucine, isoleucine, valine, alanine
Time
Buffer
Acetonitrile
(min)
(per cent)
(per cent)
0.01
85
15
20
58
42
22
0
100
26
0
100
28
85
15
35
85
15
analyte peak. Calculate the content of
gymnemagenin in the substance being examined
Properties and Action: Rasa: Tikta, Kaya;

Gua: Laghu, Rka; Vrya: Ua; Vipka:
Kau; Karma: Cakuya, Dpana, Gulmaghna,
Kaphahara, Vtahara, laghna, Viaghna
45
Important
formulations:
Ayaskti,
Mtasajvan sur, Mahviagarbha taila,
Nyagrodhdi cra
Therapeutic uses: Gulma (abdominal lump),

Kuha (disease of skin), Prameha (increased
frequency and turbidity of urine), Sthaulya
(obesity), irala (headache), Vidradhi
(abscess)
46
MEAG HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT

10.0 : 8.0). Dry the plate in air. Spray the plate with
10 per cent methanolic sulphuric acid reagent and
heat at 1050 till the colour of the spots/bands appear
without charring. The chromatographic profile of
the test solution shows a band corresponding to that
of the standard solution (Fig. 1).
Meag Hydro-alcoholic Extract is a dried and

powdered extract prepared from Meag
(appropriately powered). The extract contains not
less than 20 per cent of gymnemic acids and not less
than 4 per cent of gymnemagenin when assayed.
Visible after derivatisation Rf

1.0
Take Meag suitably sized (powder or

exceeding 800 till the moisture is below 5 per cent.
Mill the mass and sieve the powder through 500
m mesh to obtain the extract and pack. The yield
0.5
0.0
RS
T
Meag hydro-alcoholic extract

solution: Extract 0.5 g of substance by refluxing
with a mixture of 50 per cent methanol and 11 per
cent potassium hydroxide solution (10 : 2), for a
period of 1 hour. Add 1.8 ml of concentrated
hydrochloric acid and reflux again for one hour on
water bath. Cool and adjust the pH between 7.5 to
8.5 with 11 per cent potassium hydroxide solution.
Dilute to 50 ml with 50 per cent of methanol and
filter. Standard solution: Dissolve 10 mg of
gymnemagenin RS in 10 ml of methanol.
solutions as bands at a height of 10 mm from the
base of a 10 x 5 cm TLC plate and develop up to 8
cm from the base of the plate using the mobile
phase: ethyl acetate : methanol : formic acid (82.0 :
(Appendix 2.1.4); Total Ash: not more than 15.0 per
Other requirements:
(Appendix 3.3); Residual solvent: Complies with the
47
Time
(min)
0.01
20
22
26
28
35

examined, in a 100 ml round bottomed flask;
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
15
42
100
100
15
15

Assay:
(Appendix 3.6).Test solution: Take about 0.5 g,
1.8 ml of concentrated hydrochloric acid and
again reflux for one hour on a water bath. Cool
and adjust pH between 7.5 to 8.5 with 11 per cent
potassium hydroxide solution and make up the
volume to 100 ml with 50 per cent methanol. Take
20 ml of this solution add 400 mg of polyamide
(C-200), stir for one hour and filter the
supernatant through 0.42 m membrane.
weighed, gymnemagenin RS in a 50-ml
volumetric flask and dissolve in about 25 ml of 50
per cent methanol and make up the volume with
50 per cent methanol. Filter through 0.42 m
mixture of acetonitrile and water containing 0.1
per cent of orthophosphoric acid in the following
proportions:-
Meag hydro-alcoholic extract
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatogram of Meag hydroalcoholic extract with Gymnemagenin as RS

API Gymnemagenin RS
48
Buffer
(per cent)
85
58
0
0
85
85
MEAG WATER EXTRACT

Meag Water Extract is a dried and powdered
extract prepared from Meag. The extract
contains not less than 15 per cent of gymnemic
acids and not less than 2.5 per cent of
gymnemagenin when assayed.
10 per cent methanolic sulphuric acid reagent and

without charring. The chromatographic profile of the
test solution shows a band corresponding to that of
the standard solution (Fig. 1).
Take Meag suitably sized (powder or

pieces) in an extractor. Add water, about 3 times
the quantity of raw material and heat at a
the extract through a filter (preferably 10 m pore
size) to a suitable sized vessel. The marc is
under vacuum (between 400-600 mm of Hg) at a
temperature not exceeding 800 till the moisture is
below 5 per cent. Mill the mass and sieve the
powder through 500 m mesh and pack. The
Rf
1.0
0.5
0.0
RS
T
Meag water extract
solution: Extract 0.5 g of substance by refluxing with
a mixture of 50 per cent methanol and 11 per cent
potassium hydroxide solution (10 : 2), for a period of
1 hour. Add 1.8 ml of concentrated hydrochloric acid
and reflux again for one hour on water bath. Cool and
adjust the pH between 7.5 to 8.5 with 11 per cent
potassium hydroxide solution. Dilute to 50 ml with
50 per cent of methanol and filter. Standard solution:
Dissolve 10 mg of gymnemagenin RS in 10 ml of
and standard solutions as bands at a height of 10 mm
from the base of a 10 x 5 cm TLC plate and develop
up to 8 cm from the base of the plate using the mobile
phase: ethyl acetate : methanol : formic acid (82.0 :
10.0 : 8.0). Dry the plate in air. Spray the plate with
(Method-II)
Other requirements:
Heavy metals:Complies with the prescribed limits,
49
Time
(min)
0.01
20
22
26
28
35

examined, in a 100 ml round bottomed flask;
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
15
42
100
100
15
15

Assay:
1.8 ml of concentrated hydrochloric acid and
again reflux for one hour on a water bath. Cool
and adjust pH between 7.5 to 8.5 with 11 per cent
potassium hydroxide solution and make up the
volume to 100 ml with 50 per cent methanol. Take
20 ml of this solution add 400 mg of polyamide
(C-200), stir for one hour and filter the
supernatant. Filter through 0.42 m membrane.
weighed, gymnemagenin RS in a 50-ml
volumetric flask and dissolve in about 25 ml of 50
per cent methanol and make up the volume with
50 per cent methanol. Filter through 0.42 m
mixture of acetonitrile and water containing 0.1
per cent of orthophosphoric acid in the following
proportions:-
Meag water extract
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatogram of Meag

water extract with Gymnemagenin as RS

API Gymnemagenin RS
50
Buffer
(per cent)
85
58
0
0
85
85
METH
Meth consists of seeds of Trigonella foenumgraecum L. (Fam. Fabaceae); an aromatic, 30 to
60 cm tall, annual herb, cultivated throughout the
country. Meth contains not less than 5 per cent
of saponins and not less than 0.2 per cent of 4hydroxyisoleucine when assayed.
c) Powder:
Powder
shows groups of palisade
parenchymatous and bearer cells in top and side
views, aleurone grains, oil globules, endosperm
and epidermal cells of testa (Fig. 1).
Synonym:
Methi; Bengali: Methi; English: Fenugreek;
Gujarati: Methi; Hindi: Methi; Kannada: Menthe,
Mente; Kashmiri: Methi; Malayalam: Uluva;
Marathi: Methi; Punjabi: Methi; Tamil: Ventayam;
Telugu: Mentulu; Urdu: Methi
Description:
a) Macroscopic:
Seed oblong, rhomboidal with deep furrow
running obliquely from one side, dividing seed
into a larger and smaller part, 0.2 to 0.5 cm long,
0.15 to 0.35 cm broad, smooth, very hard; dull
yellow; seed becomes mucilaginous when soaked
in water; odour pleasant; taste bitter.
b) Microscopic:
Seed - Seed shows a layer of thick-walled, columnar
palisade, covered externally with thick cuticle; cells
flat at base, mostly pointed but a few flattened at
apex, supported internally by a tangentially wide
bearer cells having radial rib-like thickenings;
followed by 4 to 5 layers of tangentially elongated,
thin-walled, parenchymatous cells; endosperm
consists of a layer of thick-walled cells containing
aleurone grains, several layers of thin walled,
mucilaginous cells, varying in size, long axis radially
elongated in outer region and tangentially elongated
in inner region; cotyledons consists of 3 to 4 layers of
palisade cells varying in size with long axis and a few
layers of rudimentary spongy tissue; rudimentary
vascular tissue situated in spongy mesophyll; cells of
cotyledon contain aleurone grains and oil globules.
Fig. 1: Powdered drug of Meth

(Trigonella foenum-graecum L.)

Identification:
using 4-hydroxyisoleucine as a reference
standard. Test solution: Extract 2 g of substance
25 ml. Standard solution: Dissolve 2.5 mg of
4-hydroxyisoleucine RS in 10 ml of methanol.
51


Rf
1.0
Assay of Saponins:
Carry out the assay by gravimetry. Take about 5 g,
and reflux with 50 per cent of methanol (50 ml x 3)
Combine all the filtrates, concentrate and evaporate
to dryness under reduced pressure. Add 25 ml of
petroleum ether (400-600) to the residue and reflux
for 10 min cool and decant the petroleum ether layer.
Add 10 ml of methanol to the residue and dissolve,
add 100 ml of acetone; filter the precipitate in a tared
filter paper. Dry the residue at 800 for one hour and
weigh the residue. Calculate the content of saponins
from the weight of the residue.
0.5
0.0
RS
T
Fig. 2: Thin-Layer Chromatogram of Meth
RS: 4-Hydroxyisoleucine, T: Test solution
using the mobile phase: n-butanol : acetic acid :
water (40 : 10 : 10). Dry the plate in air. Spray the
plate with 1 per cent ninhydrin in methanol
Assay:
in a 25-ml of volumetric flask and add 2.5 ml of
coupling solution (40 ml of acetonitrile : 8 ml of
triethylamine : 12 ml of Water), sonicate until all the
sample is dissolved. Add 125 l of phenyl
isothiocyanate to the solution and sonicate for 5 min
and make up the volume with methanol. Dilute 5 ml
of this solution to 50 ml with mixture of 35 volumes
of methanol and 65 volumes of water. Filter through
0.42 m membrane.Standard solution: Take about 2.5
mg, accurately weighed, 4-hydroxyisoleucine RS in a
10 ml volumetric flask and add 1 ml of coupling
solution (40 ml of acetonitrile : 8 ml of triethylamine :
12 ml of Water), sonicate until the entire sample is
dissolved. Add 50 l of phenyl isothiocyanate to the
solution and sonicate for 5 min and make up the
volume with methanol. Dilute 5 ml of this solution to
50 ml with mixture of 35 volumes of methanol and 65
volumes of water. Filter through 0.42 m membrane.
chromatography. Column and stationary phase: C18
(100 mm x 3.0 mm, 5 m). Mobile phase: Filtered and
Other requirements:
52
degassed gradient mixture of acetonitrile and water

containing 0.1 per cent of orthophosphoric acid in the
following proportions:
Time
(min)
Water containing 0.1 per

cent orthophosphoric
acid (per cent)
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
0.01
30
32
36
38
45
0.01
80
30
0
0
80
80
80
20
70
100
100
20
20
20


API 4-Hydroxyisoleucine RS
Constituents: Graecunins H, I, J, K, L, M, N;
trigofoenosides A, D, F, G; trigoneosides IIa, Ib,
diosgenin. Trigoneosides Ia, IIb, IIIa, IIIb, Xa, Xb,
XIb, XIIa, XIIb and XIIIa, yamogenin tetroside B
and C, smilagenin, sarsa-sapogenin, yamogenin,
tigogenin and neotigogenin, yuccagenin, gitogenin
and neogitogenin, vitexin, saponaretin,
homoorientin, vicenin-1 and vicenin-2. Seed oil
contains octadecatrienoic acid

content of 4-hydroxyisoleucine in the substance
being examined from the peak response of
analyte. The test is not valid unless the relative

Laghu, Snigdha; Vrya: Ua; Vipka: Kau;
Karma: Dpana, Kaphahara, Rucya, Vtahara
Important formulations: Mustakria,

Mtasajvan sur
Therapeutic uses: Aruci (tastelessness),

Graha (malabsorption syndrome), Jvara
(fever), Prameha (increased frequency turbidity
of urine)
Meth
Fig. 3: HPLC chromatogram of Meth with

4-Hydroxyisoleucine as RS
53
METH HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT

Meth Hydro-alcoholic Extract is a dried and
powdered extract prepared from Meth
less than 50 per cent of saponins and not less than
0.5 per cent of 4-hydroxyisoleucine when assayed.

Visible after derivatization
Rf
1.0
Take Meth suitably sized (powder or pieces) in
0.5
0.0
RS
T


using 4-hydroxyisoleucine as a reference
25 ml. Standard solution: Dissolve 2.5 mg of 4hydroxyisoleucine RS in 10 ml of methanol.
water (40 : 10 : 10). Dry the plate in air. Spray the
plate with 1 per cent ninhydrin in methanol
Other requirements:
54
Assay of Saponins:
Time
(min)
Carry out the assay by gravimetry. Take about 5 g,

and reflux with 50 per cent of methanol (50 ml x 3)
Combine all the filtrates, concentrate and evaporate
to dryness under reduced pressure. Add 25 ml of
petroleum ether (400-600) to the residue and reflux
for 10 min cool and decant the petroleum ether layer.
Add 10 ml of methanol to the residue and dissolve,
add 100 ml of acetone; filter the precipitate in a tared
filter paper. Dry the residue at 800 for one hour and
weigh the residue. Calculate the content of saponins
from the weight of the residue.
0.01
30
32
36
38
45
0.01

Detection: UV 254 nm. Procedure: Inject 5 l of the
standard solution and record the chromatogram. Inject
5 l of the test solution, record the chromatogram and
measure the response for the analyte peak.Calculate the
content of 4-hydroxyisoleucine in the substance being
examined from the peak response of analyte. The test is
not valid unless the relative standard deviation for
Assay:
examined in a 25-ml of volumetric flask and add 2.5
ml of coupling solution (40 ml of acetonitrile : 8 ml
of triethylamine : 12 ml of Water), sonicate until all
the sample is dissolved. Add 125 l of phenyl
isothiocyanate to the solution and sonicate for 5 min
and make up the volume with methanol. Dilute 5 ml
of thissolution to 50 ml with mixture of 35 volumes
of methanol and 65 volumes of water and filter
Take about 2.5 mg, accurately weighed, 4hydroxyisoleucine RS in a 10-ml volumetric flask
and add 1 ml of coupling solution (40 ml of
acetonitrile : 8 ml of triethylamine : 12 ml of Water),
sonicate until the entire sample is dissolved. Add 50
l of phenyl isothiocyanate to the solution and
sonicate for 5 min and make up the volume with
methanol. Dilute 5 ml of this solution to 50 ml with
mixture of 35 volumes of methanol and 65 volumes
of water and filter through 0.42 m membrane.
acetonitrile and water containing 0.1 per cent of
orthophosphoric acid in the following proportions:-
Meth hydro-alcoholic extrtact
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatogram of Meth

4- Hydroxyisoleucine as RS
followed by the Latin binominal name and the part
of the plant contained in the article.
55
Water containing 0.1

Acetonitrile
percent orthophosphoric (per cent)
acid (per cent)
80
20
30
70
0
100
0
100
80
20
80
20
80
20
METH WATER EXTRACT

Meth Water Extract is dried and powdered extract

prepared from Meth. The extract contains not less
than 20 per cent of saponins and not less than
0.2 per cent of 4-hydroxyisoleucine when assayed.
Rf
1.0
Take Meth suitably sized (powder or pieces) in an
RS
T
water extract

4.07.0 (Appendix 2.1.10); Total soluble solids:
(Method-II)
0.5
0.0

using
4-hydroxyisoleucine as a reference
25 ml. Standard solution: Dissolve 2.5 mg of 4hydroxyisoleucine RS in 10 ml of methanol.
Water (40 : 10 : 10). Dry the plate in air. Spray
the plate with 1 per cent ninhydrin in methanol
Other requirements:
Assay of Saponins:
Carry out the assay by gravimetry. Take about 5
g, accurately weighed, of the substance being
examined and reflux with 50 per cent of methanol
(50 ml x 3) on water bath for one hour each, cool
56
and evaporate to dryness under reduced pressure.

Add 25 ml of petroleum ether (400-600) to the
residue and reflux for 10 min cool and decant the
petroleum ether layer. Add 10 ml of methanol to
the residue and dissolve, add 100 ml of acetone;
filter the precipitate in a tared filter paper. Dry the
residue at 800 for one hour and weigh the residue.
Calculate the content of saponins from the weight
of the residue.
Assay:
Water containing 0.1 per

cent orthophosphoric acid
(per cent)
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
0.01
30
32
36
38
45
0.01
80
30
0
0
80
80
80
20
70
100
100
20
20
20

standard solution and record the chromatogram.
analyte peak. Calculate the content of 4hydroxyisoleucine in the substance being examined

examined in a 25-ml of volumetric flask and add
2.5 ml of coupling solution (40 ml of acetonitrile
: 8 ml of triethylamine : 12 ml of Water), sonicate
until all the sample is dissolved. Add 125 l of
phenyl isothiocyanate to the solution and sonicate
for 5 min and make up the volume with methanol.
Dilute 5 ml of this solution to 50 ml with mixture
of 35 volumes of methanol and 65 volumes of
water and filter through 0.42 m membrane.
Standard solution: Take about 2.5 mg, accurately
weighed, 4-hydroxyisoleucine RS in a 10-ml
volumetric flask and add 1 ml of coupling
solution (40 ml of acetonitrile : 8 ml of
triethylamine : 12 ml of water), sonicate until the
entire sample is dissolved. Add 50 l of phenyl
isothiocyanate to the solution and sonicate for 5
min and make up the volume with methanol.
Dilute 5 ml of this solution to 50 ml with mixture
of 35 volumes of methanol and 65 volumes of
water and filter through 0.42 m membrane.
acetonitrile and water containing 0.1 per cent of
orthophosphoric acid in the following
proportions:-
Meth water extract
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatogram of Meth water extract

with 4-Hydroxyisoleucine as RS
57
Time
(min)
NIRGU
a discontinuous ring in the distal region surrounding
a central crescent shaped stele; a few smaller vascular
bundles present below the crescent and two, or rarely
three, bundles situated above the crescent.
Nirgu consists of dried leaves of Vitex negundo

(L.) Dunal. (Fam. Verbenaceae), a large aromatic
shrub or a small tree, upto 4.5 m in height, common
throughout the country ascending to an altitude of
1500 m in the outer Himalayas. It is common in
waste places around villages, river banks, moist
localities and in the deciduous forests. Nirgu
contains not less than 0.25 per cent of negundoside
and 1.0 per cent agnuside when assayed.
Aslak; Bengali: Nirgundi, Nishinda; Gujarati: Nagod;
Hindi: Nirgundi, Sindur, Sambhalu; Kannada:
Lakkigida, Nekkigida; Malayalam: Indranee,
Nirgundi; Marathi: Nirgudi; Punjabi: Sambhalu,
Banna; Tamil: Karunochchi, Nocchi; Telugu:
Nallavavilli, Vavili; Urdu: Sambhalu, Panjangusht
Lamina - shows single layered epidermis having

mostly unicellular hairs, bi and multicellular and
glandular trichomes being rare; hypodermis 1-3
layered, interrupted at places by 4-8 palisade layers
containing chlorophyll; mesophyll almost entirely of
palisade cell layers, with isodiametric parenchymatous
cells sparsely distributed in the spongy region, and
present more at the edges of the lamina; a large number
of veins enclosed by bundle sheath traverse mesophyll;
stomata present only on the ventral surface, covered
densely with trichomes; vein-islet and vein termination
number of leaf are 23-25 and 5-7 respectively.
Description:
c) Powder:
Synonyms: Sinduvra, ephlik, Nla
a) Macroscopic:
Leaves born on a rachis 2.5-3.8 cm long;
palmately compound, mostly trifoliate,
occasionally pentafoliate; in trifoliate leaf, leaflet
lanceolate or narrowly lanceolate, middle leaflet
5-10 cm long and 1.6-3.2 cm broad, with 1-1.3 cm
long petiole, remaining two sub-sessile; in
pentafoliate leaf inner three leaflets have petiole
and remaining two sub-sessile; surface glabrous
above and tomentose beneath; texture leathery.
b) Microscopic:
Rachis - T.S. shows single layered epidermis having
a number of unicellular, bicellular and uniseriate
multicellular covering trichomes and also glandular
trichomes with uni to tricellular stalk and uni to
bicellular head; cortex composed of outer
collenchymatous tissue and inner 6-8 layers of
parenchymatous tissue; collenchyma well developed
in basal region and gradually decreases towards
middle and distal regions; pericyclic fibres absent in
the basal region of petiole but present in the form of
Fig. 1: Powdered drug of NIRGU (Vitex

negundo (L.) Dunal.)
58
The powder shows bicellular trichomes and

groups of vessels with scalariform thickenings
besides tissue fragments comprising both thin and
thick walled cells (Fig. 1).
profile of the test solution shows bands

corresponding to that of the standard solution
(Fig. 2).

(Appendix 2.1.9)
Identification:
negundoside and agnuside as reference standards.
Visible after
derivatisation
254 nm
Rf
Other requirements:
1.0
Assay:
0.5
(1)
(2)

to a 100-ml round bottomed flask, reflux with
methanol (50 ml x 3) on a water bath for 15 min each,
cool and filter. Combine all the filtrates, concentrate
and make up the volume in a 100-ml volumetric flask.
Filter through 0.42 m membrane. Standard solution:
Take about 10 mg, accurately weighed, each of
negundoside RS and agnuside RS in a 100-ml
Filter through 0.42 m membrane. Chromatographic
system: High performance liquid chromatography.
Column and stationary phase: C18 (250 mm x 4.6
mm, 5 m). Mobile phase: Filtered and degassed
gradient mixture of phosphate buffer (prepared by
orthophosphate in 900 ml of water, adding 0.5 ml of
orthophosphoric acid and making up the volume to
1000 ml) and acetonitrile in the following proportions:
(1)
(2)
0.0
RS
T
RS
T
Fig. 2: Thin-Layer Chromatogram of Nirgu
RS: (1) Negundoside and (2) Agnuside,
T: Test solution
using the mobile phase: ethyl acetate : glacial
acetic acid : water (8.0 : 1.0 : 1.0). Dry the plate
in air and examine under UV 254 nm. Spray the
plate with of anisaldehyde- sulphuric acid reagent
and heat at 1050 till the colour of the spots/bands
appear without charring. The chromatographic
59
Time
(min)
0.01
10
20
23
25
35
Phosphate buffer
(per cent)
95
85
70
85
95
95
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
5
15
30
15
5
5


API Negundoside RS and Agnuside RS
Constituents:
Negundoside, nishindaside.
agnuside, mussaenoside tetraacetate, mussaenoside
pentaacetate, 6'-p-hydroxybenzoyl mussaenosidic
acid, 2'-p-hydroxybenzoyl mussaenosidic acid,
-phellandrene,
sabinene, p-cymene,
-terpinene, terpinen-4-ol,
-caryophyllene,
viridiflorol, -eudesmol, -pinene, -carene,
limonene, camphene, citral, caryophyllene, methyl
heptanone, linalool, camphor, 1,8-cineole, terpineol, geraniol, caryophyllene oxide, terpenyl
acetate,
geranyl
acetate,
benzaldehyde,
cinnamaldehyde,
5-hydroxy-3,6,7,3',4'pentamethoxy flavone, 5,3'-dihydroxy-7,8,4'trimethoxy flavanone, 5,3'-dihydroxy-6,7,4'trimethoxy flavanone, 4,4'- dimethoxy-transstilbene, 5,6,7,8,3'4'5'-heptamethoxy flavone, 5-Odesmethylnobiletin, gardenin A, B, corymbosin

record the chromatogram and identify the analyte
peaks using the relative retention times, as below.
Analyte
Negundoside
1.00
Agnuside
1.15
Calculate the content of negundoside and
agnuside in the substance being examined from
the peak response of analytes. The test is not valid
unless the relative standard deviation for replicate
Properties and Action: Rasa: Tikta, Kau,

Kaya; Gua: Laghu; Vrya: Ua; Vipka:
Kau; Karma: Ksaghna, Kmighna, Kaphahara,
Vtahara, Vraaodhana
Important formulations: Damla taila,

Mahvtavidhvaana rasa, Nirgu taila,
Tribhuvanakrti rasa, Trivikrama rasa,
Vtagajkua rasa, Viatinduka taila,
Yaktplhri lauha
Nirgu
Therapeutic uses: Aruci (anorexia), vsa

(dyspnoea), Ksa (cough), Kmi (helminthiasis),
Pratiyya (coryza), Sandhiotha (arthritis),
otha (inflammation), Vtavydhi (disease due to
vta doa/neurological disease), Vraa (wound)
Fig. 3: HPLC chromatograms of Nirgu

with Negundoside and Agnuside as RS
60
NIRGU HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT

Nirgu Hydro-alcoholic Extract is a dried and
powdered extract prepared from Nirgu
not less than 1 per cent of negundoside and 0.05
per cent agnuside when assayed.

the test solution shows bands corresponding to that
254 nm

Rf
1.0
Take Nirgu suitably sized (powder or pieces)
in an extractor. Add 50 per cent aqueous alcohol,
heat under reflux at a temperature between 80-850
for 3-4 hours. Filter the extract through a filter
vessel. Concentrate the combined filtrate to a (1)
syrupy consistency and dry under vacuum (2)

using negundoside and agnuside as reference
negundoside RS and agnuside RS in 10 ml of
the mobile phase: ethyl acetate : glacial acetic acid
: water (8.0 : 1.0 : 1.0). Dry the plate in air and
examine under UV 254 nm. Spray the plate with of
anisaldehyde-sulphuric acid reagent and heat at
1050 till the colour of the spots/bands appear
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
0.0
RS
T
RS
T
Nirgu hydro-alcoholic extract
T: Test solution
cent (Appendix 2.1.11) (Method-I)
Other requirements:
61
0.5

Analyte
Negundoside
Agnuside
Assay:


examined to a 100-ml round bottomed flask,
reflux with methanol (50 ml x 3) on a water bath
for 15 min each, cool and filter. Combine all the
filtrates, concentrate and make up the volume in a
100-ml volumetric flask. Filter through 0.42 m
accurately weighed, each of negundoside RS and
agnuside RS in a 100-ml volumetric flask and
dissolve in about 50 ml of methanol and make up
mixture of phosphate buffer (prepared by
orthophosphate in 900 ml of water, adding 0.5 ml
of orthophosphoric acid and making up the
volume to 1000 ml) and acetonitrile in the
Time
(min)
0.01
10
20
23
25
35
Phosphate buffer
(per cent)
95
85
70
85
95
95
Nirgu hydro-alcoholic extract

Negundoside and Agnuside as RS
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
5
15
30
15
5
5



peaks using the relative retention times.
62

1.00
1.15
NIRGU WATER EXTRACT

254 nm
Nirgu Water Extract is a dried and powdered

extract prepared from Nirgu. The extract should
contain not less than 1 per cent of negundoside and
0.05 per cent agnuside when assayed.
Visible after
derivatisation
Rf
1.0
Take Nirgu suitably sized (powder or pieces)
0.5
(1)
(2)
0.0

RS
T
RS
T
Nirgu water extract
T: Test solution

negundoside and agnuside as reference standards.
Test solution: Extract 2 g of substance by refluxing
Filter and concentrate the extract to 25 ml. Standard
solution: Dissolve 10 mg each of negundoside RS
and agnuside RS in 10 ml of methanol. Procedure:
Apply 10 l each of the test and standard solutions as
bands at a height of 10 mm from the base of a 10 x 5
cm TLC plate and develop up to 8 cm from the base
of the plate using the mobile phase: ethyl acetate:
glacial acetic acid : water (8.0 : 1.0 : 1.0). Dry the
plate in air and examine under UV 254 nm. Spray the
plate with of anisaldehyde sulphuric acid reagent and
without charring. The chromatographic profile of the
test solution shows bands corresponding to that of the

(Method-II)
Other requirements:
63
(1)
(2)
Assay:
Analyte
Negundoside
Agnuside

examined to a 100 ml round bottomed flask,
reflux with methanol (50 ml x 3) on a water bath
for 15 min each, cool and filter. Combine all the
filtrates, concentrate and make up the volume in a
100-ml volumetric flask. Filter through 0.42 m
accurately weighed, each of negundoside RS and
agnuside RS in a 100-ml volumetric flask and
dissolve in about 50 ml of methanol and make up
mixture of phosphate buffer (prepared by
dissolving 0.14 g of Potassium dihydrogen
orthophosphate in 900 ml of water, adding 0.5 ml
of Orthophosphoric acid and making up the
volume to 1000 ml) and Acetonitrile in the
Time
(min)
0.01
10
20
23
25
35
Phosphate buffer
(per cent)
95
85
70
85
95
95

Nirgu water extract

water extract with Negundoside and
Agnuside as RS
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
5
15
30
15
5
5

peaks using the relative retention times, as below.

64

1.00
1.15
PUNARNAV
thickenings; trachieds, thick-walled with simple
pits; fibres aseptate, elongate, thick-walled with
pointed ends; phloem occurs as hemispherical or
crescent patches outside each group of xylem
vessels and composed of sieve elements and
parenchyma; a broad zone of parenchymatous
tissue, in between two successive rings of xylem
elements, composed of thin-walled, more or less
rectangular cells arranged in radial rows; central
region of root occupied by primary vascular
bundles; numerous raphides in single or in groups
present in cortical region and in parenchymatous
and xylem tissue; starch grains simple measuring up
to 11 in diameter and compound, having 2 to 4
components, found in abundance in most of the
cells of cortex and xylem elements.
Punarnav consists of dried root of Boerhaavia

diffusa L. (Fam. Nyctaginaceae); a trailing herb
with stout root stock and many diffused, slender,
prostrate or ascending branches. The extract
contains not less than 0.005 per cent of
boeravinone B when assayed.
Synonyms: Kahill, ophaghn, othaghn
Other/Regional Language Names: Assamese: Ranga
Punanabha; Bengali: Rakta punarnava; English:
Horse Purslene, Hog Weed; Gujarati: Dholisaturdi,
Motostodo; Hindi: Gadapurna, Lalpunarnava;
Kannada: Snadika, Kommeberu, Komma; Kashmiri:
Vanjula punarnava; Malayalam: Chuvanna
Tazhutama, Tavilama, Tlutama; Marathi: Ghetuli,
Vasuchi muli, Satodimula, Punarnava, Khaparkhuti;
Oriya: Lalapuiruni, Malipuruni; Punjabi: ltcit (Ial),
Khattan; Tamil: Mukurattai (Shihappu); Telugu:
Atikammamidi, Erragalijeru; Urdu: Surkh
punarnava
c) Powder:
Light yellow; shows vessels with reticulate
thickenings or simple pits, fibres, fragments of
cork cells, cells containing raphides of calcium
oxalate and simple, rounded, starch grains,
measuring 2.75 to 11 in diameter and compound
starch grains having 2 to 4 components (Fig. 1.)
Description:
a) Macroscopic:
Root well developed, fairly long, somewhat
tortuous, cylindrical, 0.2 to 1.5 cm in diameter;
yellowish to brown; surface rough due to minute
longitudinal striations and root scars; fracture
short; odour not distinct; taste slightly bitter.
b) Microscopic:
Mature root shows anomalous growth; cork
composed of thin-walled, tangentially elongated
cells in the outer few layers; cork cambium 1 to 2
layers of thin-walled cells; secondary cortex
consists of 2 to 3 layers of parenchymatous cells,
followed by cortex composed of 5 to 12 layers of
thin-walled, oval to polygonal cells; several
concentric bands of xylem tissues, alternating with
zone of parenchymatous tissue present below
cortical region; number of bands vary according to
thickness of root and consists of vessels, trachieds
and fibres; vessels mostly found in groups of 2 to 8
in radial rows, having simple pits and reticulate
Fig. 1: Powdered drug of PUNARNAV

(Boerhaavia diffusa L.)
65

Identification:

Thin- layer chromatography:
Other requirements:

using boeravinone B as a reference standard. Test
with 50 ml of methanol for a period of 15 min.
Standard solution: Dissolve 2 mg of boeravinone
B RS in 10 ml of methanol. Procedure: Apply 10
l each of the test and standard solutions as bands
at a height of 10 mm from the base of a 10 x 5 cm
TLC plate and develop up to 8 cm from the base
of the plate using the mobile phase: toluene : ethyl
acetate : formic acid (4.0 : 5.0 : 1.0).
254 nm

Assay:
Take about 2.5 mg, accurately weighed,
boeravinone B RS in a 100-ml volumetric flask
and dissolve in about 50 ml of methanol and make
up the volume with methanol. Filter through 0.42
mixture of water and acetonitrile in the following
proportions:-
Rf
1.0
0.5
0.0
RS
Time
(min)
0.01
5
15
20
23
25
30
Fig. 2: Thin-Layer Chromatogram of Punarnav

RS: Boeravinone B, T: Test solution
Dry the plate in air and examine under UV 254

nm. The chromatographic profile of the test
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
20
45
80
80
45
20
20


66
Water
(per cent)
80
55
20
20
55
80
80

content of boeravinone B in the substance being
2.0 per cent.
API Boeravinone B RS
Constituents: Punarnavoside, boeravinone C,

liriodendrin; hypoxanthine-9-L-arabinofuranoside,
eupalitin-3-O--D-galactopyranoside. Eupalitin,
eupalitin-3-O--D-galactopyranosyl-(12)O--D-galactopyranoside,
3,35-trihydroxy-7methoxyflavone,
4,7-dihydroxy-3methylflavone, 3,4-dimethoxy phenyl-1-O--Dapiofuranosyl-(13)-O--D-glucopyranoside.
Properties and Action: Rasa: Madhura,

Tikta; Gua: Rka; Vrya: Ua; Vipka:
Madhura; Karma: Anulomana, Mtravirecanya,
Rasyana, othahara, Vtalemahara
Important formulations: Punarnavtaka
Fig. 3: HPLC chromatogram of Punarnav

with Boeravinone B as RS
kvtha cra, Punarnavdi

Punarnavsava, Sukumra ghta
Therapeutic uses: Dhtu kaya (tissue

wasting), Pu (anaemeia), otha (inflammation)

67
mara,
PUNARNAV HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT

254 nm
Punarnav Hydro-alcoholic Extract is a dried and

powdered extract prepared from Punarnav
not less than 0.025 per cent of boeravinone B
when assayed.
Rf
1.0
0.5
Take Punarnav suitably sized (powder or pieces)

in an extractor. Add 50 per cent aqueous alcohol,
0.0
RS
T
Punarnav water extract
6.0- 8.0 (Appendix 2.1.10); Total soluble solids:
(Method-I)

of the plate using the mobile phase: toluene : ethyl
acetate : formic acid (4.0 : 5.0 : 1.0). Dry the plate
in air and examine under UV 254 nm. The
Other requirements:
Assay:
68

boeravinone B RS in a 100-ml volumetric flask
up the volume with methanol. Filter through 0.42
mixture of water and acetonitrile in the following
proportions:Time
(min)
0.01
5
15
20
23
25
30
Water
(per cent)
80
55
20
20
55
80
80

Boeravinone B as RS
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
20
45
80
80
45
20
20



2.0 per cent.
69
PUNARNAV WATER EXTRACT

254 nm
Punarnav Water Extract is a dried and powdered

extract prepared from Punarnav. The extract
contains not less than 0.0025 per cent of
boeravinone B when assayed.
Rf
1.0
Take Punarnav suitably sized (powder or pieces)
between 80850 for 3-4 hours. Filter the extract
through a filter (preferably10 m pore size) to a
Mill the mass and sieve the powder through 500
m mesh and pack. The yield obtained is about 8
per cent.
0.5
0.0
RS
T
Punarnav water extract

of the plate using the mobile phase : toluene :
ethyl acetate : formic acid (4.0 : 5.0 : 1.0). Dry the
plate in air and examine under UV 254 nm. The
Other requirements:
Assay:
70

boeravinone B RS in a 100 ml volumetric flask
up the volume with methanol. Filter through
0.42 m membrane. Chromatographic system:
High performance liquid chromatography.
Column and stationary phase: C18 (250 mm x 4.6
mm, 5 m). Mobile phase: Filtered and degassed
gradient mixture of water and acetonitrile in the
Time
(min)
0.01
5
15
20
23
25
30
Water
(per cent)
80
55
20
20
55
80
80

water extract with Boeravinone B as RS
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
20
45
80
80
45
20
20



min. Detection: UV, 280 nm. Procedure: Inject
20 l of the standard solution and record the
2.0 per cent.
71
ALLAK (Exudate)
allak consists of exudate of Boswellia serrata
Roxb. (Fam. Burseraceae), a moderate sized,
deciduous tree, upto 18 m in height and upto 2.4
m in girth, commonly found in the dry forests
from Punjab to West Bengal and in peninsular
India. It contains not less than 4.0 per cent of boswellic acid when assayed.

Identification:
using -boswellic acid as a reference standard.
refluxing with 50 ml of methanol for a period of 15
min. Filter and concentrate the extract to 25 ml.
Synonym: Kunduru
Other/Regional
Language
Names:
Assamese: Sallaki; Bengali: Salai, Salgai;

English: Indian Olibanum Tree; Gujarati:
Shaledum, Saleda, Saladi, Gugal, Saledhi; Hindi:
Salai, Labana; Kannada: Madimar, Chilakdupa,
Tallaki, Maddi; Kashmiri: Kunturukkam,
Samprani; Marathi: Salai cha dink; Punjabi: Salai
Gonda; Tamil: Kundurukam; Telugu: Anduga,
Kondagugi tamu; Urdu: Kundur

Rf
1.0
Description:
0.5
a) Macroscopic:
Drug occurs in stalactitic, transparent, tears
forming agglomerates of various shapes and
sizes, brownish-yellow, upto 5 cm long, 2 cm
thick, fragrant, fracture brittle; fractured surface
waxy and translucent; burns readily and emanates
an agreeable characteristic, balsamic resinous
odour; taste, aromatic and agreeable
0.0
RS
T
Fig. 2: Thin-Layer Chromatogram of allak
RS: -boswellic acid, T: Test solution
Identification - Trituration with water forms an

emulsion; when immersed in alcohol (90 per cent)
a tear of' allak is not altered much in form but
becomes almost opaque and white; when a drop
of con. H2SO4 is added to a freshly fractured
surface, it becomes cherry red which, when
washed with water changes to a white emulsion,
turning later to a buff colour
Standard solution: Dissolve 10 mg of -boswellic

acid RS in 25 ml of methanol. Procedure: Apply 10
TLC plate and develop up to 8 cm from the base of
the plate using the mobile phase: toluene : etthyl
acetate : methanol (8.0 :1.5 : 0.5). Spray the plate
with anisaldehyde - sulphuric acid reagent and heat
at 1050 till the colour of the spots/ bands appear
Fluorescence Test - Brownish-yellow colour in day

light; aqueous extract under UV light (366 nm) light
green and in (254 nm) shows dark blue colour;
alcoholic extract under UV light (366 nm) is
colourless and in (254 nm) shows light green colour
72
Foreign matter: not more than 5.0 per cent (Appendix
2.1.3); Loss on drying: not more than 12.0 per cent
than 8.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.7); Alcohol-soluble
extractive: not less than 45.0 per cent (Appendix
2.1.8); Water-soluble extractive: not less than 28.0
per cent (Appendix 2.1.9)
allak
Fig. 3: HPLC chromatogram of allak

with -boswellic acid as RS
API -boswellic acid RS
Constituents: Volatile oil (9 per cent), gum and resin;
the volatile oil contains -thujene, -phellandrene, phellandrene, -terpineol, limonene, camphene,
myrcene, -terpene, p-cymene; active principles
boswellic acids from resin viz., -boswellic acid, boswellic acid,
3-O-acetyl- -boswellic acid, 11keto- -boswellic acid, 3- O- acetyl -11-keto- boswellic acid. A diterpene alcohol serratol and four
tetracyclic triterpene acids 3--acetoxytirucall-8,24dien-21-oic acid, 3-ketotirucall-8, 24-dien-21-oic acid,
3--hydroxytirucall-8, 24-dien-oic acid, 3 - hydroxytirucall-8, 24-dien-21-oic acid
Properties and Action: Rasa: Tikta, Madhura; Gua:
Guru, Snigdha, Tka; Vrya: Ua; Vipka: Kau;
Karma: Balya, Kaphahara, Kaphapittahara,
Raktastambhana, othahara, Vtahara
Important formulations: Balgucydi taila,
Bal taila, Jrkdi modaka, Karprdyarka
Therapeutic uses: Jvara (fever), Mukharoga
(disease of mouth), Pittbhiyanda (conjunctivitis
due to pitta doa), Pradara (excessive vaginal
discharge), arkarmeha (glycosuria), Sandhila
(joint pain), la (pain), vsa (dyspnoea)
Other requirements:
Assay:
on a water bath for 15 min each, cool and filter.
volume. Standard solution: Take about 10 mg,
accurately weighed, -boswellic acid RS in a 25ml volumetric flask and dissolve in about 10 ml
of methanol and make up the volume with
methanol. Chromatographic system: High
performance liquid Chromatography. Column
and stationary phase: Reverse phase C18 (250
mm x 4.6 mm, 5 m). Mobile phase: Filtered and
degassed mixture of 1 volume of water and 9
volumes of acetonitrile. Injection volume: 20 l.
Procedure: Inject 20 l of the standard solution and
record the chromatogram. Inject 20 l of the test
solution, record the chromatogram and measure the
response for the analyte peak. Calculate the content of,
-boswellic acid in the substance being examined
from the peak response of analyte. The test is not valid
73
ALLAK HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT

allak Hydro-alcoholic Extract is a dried and

powdered extract prepared from allak
(appropriately powered). The extract contains not less
than 0.4 per cent of -boswellic acid when assayed.
Rf
1.0
Take allak suitably sized (powder or pieces) in
about 3 times the quantity of raw material and heat
under a reflux at a temperature between 80-850 for
3-4 hours. Filter the extract through a filter
and sieve the powder through 500 m mesh to
obtain the extract and pack. The yield obtained is
about 45 per cent.
0.5
0.0
RS
T

(Method-I).
silica gel 60F254 plate (Appendix 3.5) using boswellic acid as a reference standard. Test
solution: Extract 0.2 g of substance by refluxing
with 50 ml of methanol for a period of 15 min. Filter
solution: Dissolve 10 mg of -boswellic acid RS in
25 ml of methanol. Procedure: Apply 10 l each of
the test and standard solutions as bands at a height
of 10 mm from the base of a 10 x 5 cm TLC plate
and develop up to 8 cm from the base of the plate
using the mobile phase: Toluene : Ethyl acetate :
Methanol (8.0 :1.5 : 0.5). Spray the plate with
anisaldehyde - sulphuric acid reagent and heat at
1050 till the colour of the spots / bands appear
Other requirements:
prescribed limits, (Appendix 3.4).
Assay:
74

volume. Filter through 0.42 m membrane.
weighed, -boswellic acid RS in a 25-ml
liquid Chromatography. Column and stationary
phase: Reverse phase C18 (250 mm x 4.6 mm, 5
mixture of 1 volume of water and 9 volumes of
measure the response for the analyte
peak.Calculate the content of -boswellic acid in
the substance being examined from the peak
response of analyte. The test is not valid unless
allak hydro-alcoholic extract

-boswellic acid as RS

75
ALLAK WATER EXTRACT

allak Water Extract is a dried and powdered

extract prepared from allak. The extract
contains not less than 0.1 per cent of -boswellic
acid when assayed.
Rf
1.0
Take allak suitably sized (powder or pieces) in an
0.5
0.0
RS
T
water extract


using -boswellic acid as a reference standard.
15 min. Filter and concentrate the extract to 25
ml. Standard solution: Dissolve 10 mg of boswellic acid RS in 25 ml of methanol.
using the mobile phase: toluene : ethyl acetate :
methanol (8.0 :1.5 : 0.5). Spray the plate with
anisaldehyde -sulphuric acid reagent and heat at
1050 till the colour of the spots/ bands appear
the test solution shows a band corresponding to
that of the standard solution (Fig. 1).
Other requirements:
Assay:
76

weighed, -boswellic acid RS in a 25-ml
liquid Chromatography. Column and stationary
phase: Reverse phase C18 (250 mm x 4.6 mm, 5
mixture of 1 volume of water and 9 volumes of
Calculate the content of -boswellic acid in the
allak water extract

water extract with -boswellic acid as RS

77
IRA
present in middle and outer phloem region; phloem
fibres, elongated, thick-walled, lignified, present in
many concentric strips, mostly enclosed by crystal
sheath throughout the middle and inner regions of
phloem; crystal fibres having a number of septa, each
chamber containing a single prismatic crystal of
calcium oxalate; phloem rays numerous, radially
elongated, somewhat wavy in outer phloem region
and bi to multiseriate in the inner phloem region,
being 2-5 cells wide and 7-25 cells high
ira consists of stem bark of Albizia lebbeck

(L.) Benth. (Fam. Mimosaceae), a large tree,
common throughout the country, ascending to
1200 m on the Himalayas. It contains not less than
5.0 per cent of total polyphenols calculated as
pyrogallol and not less than 0.1 per cent of
catechin when assayed.
Synonyms: ukapriya, Mdupupa

Other/Regional Language Names:Bengali:
Sirish, Siris; English: Siris Tree, Lebbeck Tree;
Gujarati: Shrish; Hindi: Siris, Shris; Kannada:
Bagey, Bage Mara, Hombage; Malayalam: Vaka,
Nenmenivaka; Marathi: Shirish; Oriya: Sersuan,
Sirisha; Punjabi: Sirish, Sareehn; Tamil: Vakai;
Telugu: Dirisena; Urdu: Siris
c) Powder:
Greyish-brown; shows large number of stone
cells of different sizes and shapes from rhytidoma
or cortex, prismatic crystals of calcium oxalate,
crystal fibres, phloem fibres, cork cells and
parenchymatous cells with starch grains (Fig.1).
Description:
a) Macroscopic:
Bark 1.5-2.5 cm thick, external surface dark
brown, rough due to longitudinal fissures and
transverse cracks, rhytidoma forming major part
of bark and peeling off in flakes exposing buff
coloured surface, middle bark brown, inner bark
much fibrous, light yellow to grey; fracture,
laminated in outer region and fibrous in inner
region; taste astringent
b) Microscopic:
Mature bark about 2 cm thick, shows dead tissue of
rhytidoma; cork consists of a few layers of thinwalled, transversely elongated and radially arranged
cells; secondary cortex wide, composed of radially
elongated to squarish, moderately thick-walled cells
containing orange to reddish-brown contents; a few
of the cells contain prismatic crystals of calcium
oxalate; stone cells variable in shape and size, present
in singles or in groups throughout the region;
secondary phloem consists of sieve elements,
phloem parenchyma, phloemfibres and crystal
fibres, traversed by phloem rays; prismatic crystals
of calcium oxalate present in most of the phloem
parenchyma cells; tangential bands of ceratenchyma
Fig. 1: Powdered drug of IRA

(Albizia lebbeck (L.) Benth.)
78

Identification:
using catechin as a reference standard. Test
with 50 ml of water for a period of 15 min. Filter
solution: Dissolve 10 mg of catechin RS in 10 ml
of methanol. Procedure: Apply 10 l each of the
test and standard solutions as bands at a height of
10 mm from the base of a 10 x 5 cm TLC plate
and develop up to 8 cm from the base of the plate
formic acid (1.2 : 1.8 : 1.0). Dry the plate in air and
examine under UV 254 nm. Spray the plate with
fast blue salt B reagent, and heat at 1050 till the
shows a band corresponding to that of the standard
solution (Fig. 2).
254 nm
Other requirements:
Complies with the prescribed limits,
(Appendix 3.4).
Assay for total polyphenols:

Carry out the assay by Spectrophotometry
(Appendix 3.7). Test solution: Always prepare
fresh solution. Take about 500 mg, accurately
weighed, of the substance being examined in a
100-ml round bottomed flask, reflux with 50 per
cent aqueous methanol (25 ml x 3) on water bath
for 15 min each, cool, filter and make up the
volume to 100 ml in a volumetric flask. Further
dilute 5 ml aliquot to 50 ml with water in a
volumetric flask. Standard solution: Take about
100 mg, accurately weighed, pyrogallol RS in a
ml of 50 per cent aqueous methanol and make up
to 100 ml with 50 per cent aqueous methanol.
Further dilute 5 ml to 50 ml with water in a
volumetric flask. Procedure: Pipette out 2, 5, 7
and 10 ml of standard solution and 5, 7 ml of test
solution to different 100-ml volumetric flasks.
Add 40 ml of water, 5 ml of Folins reagent and 10
ml of 30.0 per cent sodium carbonate solution to
each of the volumetric flasks. Allow to stand for
30 min. Make up the volume with water, shake
and allow to stand for 20 min more. Read in a
suitable spectrophotometer at 750 nm using water
as blank. Prepare a calibration curve from the
values obtained. Calculate the content of
polyphenols in the sample from the absorbance
using the calibration curve.

Rf
1.0
0.5
0.0
RS
T
RS
T
Fig. 2: Thin-Layer Chromatogram of ira
RS: Catechin, T: Test solution
79
Assay:

analyte peak. Calculate the content of catechin in

Combine all the filtrates, concentrate and make
up the volume in a 100-ml volumetric flask. Filter
Take about 10 mg, accurately weighed, catechin
RS in a 100-ml volumetric flask and dissolve in
about 50 ml of water and make up the volume
with water. Filter through 0.42 m membrane.
(min)
0.01
18
22
25
30
Phosphate buffer
(per cent)
95
75
75
95
95

API Catechin RS
Constituents: (+)-Catechin, saponins, (+)leucocyanidin, Albizia saponin A, Albizia saponin

B, Albizia saponin C, acacic acid, albegenin
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
5
25
25
5
5
Properties and Action: Rasa: Tikta, Kaya,

Madhura; Gua: Laghu, Rka; Vrya: Anua;
Vipka: Kau; Karma: Tridoahara, Tvagdoa,
Varya, Viaghna
Important
formulations:
Bhanmaricdya
taila,
Devadrvria, Vajraka taila
ira
Ayaskti,
Daga
lepa,
Therapeutic uses: Ksa (cough), Kmi roga

(worm infestation), Ka (pruritis), Kuha
(disease of skin), Maka via (rat poisoning),
Netrbhiyanda
(conjunctivitis),
Pm
(eczema), Pnasa (chronic rhinitis), Pratiyya
(coryza), Sarpadaa (snake bite), Sryvarta
(chronic sinusitis), taptta (urticaria), otha
(inflammation), Ardhvabhedaka (migraine),
vsa (dyspnoea), Viamajvara (intermittent
fever), Visarpa (erysipales), Vraa (wound)
Fig. 3: HPLC chromatogram of ira with

Catechin as RS

80
IRA HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT

254 nm
ira Hydro-alcoholic Extract is a dried and

powdered extract prepared from ira
not less than 10 per cent of total polyphenols
calculated as pyrogallol and not less than 0.1 per
cent of catechin when assayed.
Visible after
derivatisation
Rf
1.0
Take ira suitably sized (powder or pieces) in an
extractor. Add 50 per cent aqueous alcohol, about 3
times the quantity of raw material and heat under
reflux at a temperature between 80-850 for 3-4 hours.
Filter the extract through a filter (preferably 10 m
pore size) to a suitable sized vessel. The marc is
extracted three times more, filtering the extract each
time into the same vessel. Concentrate the combined
filtrate to a syrupy consistency and dry under vacuum
Mill the mass and sieve the powder through 500 m
mesh to obtain the extract and pack. The yield
0.5
RS
T
RS
T
Loss on drying: not more than 5.0 per cent,
(Appendix 2.1.10); Total soluble solids: not less than
90.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.11) (Method-I)

silica gel 60F254 plate (Appendix 3.5) using catechin as
a reference standard. Test solution: Extract 2 g of
substance by refluxing with 50 ml of water for a period
of 15 min. Filter and concentrate the extract to 25 ml.
Standard solution: Dissolve 10 mg of catechin RS in
10 ml of methanol. Procedure: Apply 10 l each of the
test and standard solutions as bands at a height of 10
develop up to 8 cm from the base of the plate using the
mobile phase: toluene : ethyl acetate : formic acid (1.2
: 1.8 : 1.0). Dry the plate in air and examine under UV
254 nm. Spray the plate with fast blue salt B reagent,
and heat at 1050 till the colour of the spots/bands
appear without charring. The chromatographic profile
of the test solution shows a band corresponding to that
Other requirements:

(Appendix 3.7). Test solution: Always prepare fresh
solution. Take about 500 mg, accurately weighed,
of the substance being examined in a 100-ml round
81
0.0
bottomed flask, reflux with 50 per cent aqueous

methanol (25 ml x 3) on water bath for 15 min each,
cool, filter and make up the volume to 100 ml in a
volumetric flask. Further dilute 5 ml aliquot to 50
ml with water in a volumetric flask. Standard
solution: Take about 100 mg, accurately weighed,
pyrogallol RS in a 100-ml volumetric flask and
dissolve in about 50 ml of 50 per cent aqueous
methanol and make up to 100-ml with 50 per cent
aqueous methanol. Further dilute 5 ml to 50 ml with
water in a volumetric flask. Procedure: Pipette out
2, 5, 7 and 10 ml of standard solution and 5, 7 ml of
test solution to different 100-ml volumetric flasks.
Add 40 ml of water, 5 ml of Folins reagent and 10
ml of 30.0 per cent sodium carbonate solution to
each of the volumetric flasks. Allow to stand for 30
min. Make up the volume with water, shake and
allow to stand for 20 min more. Read in a suitable
spectrophotometer at 750 nm using water as blank.
Prepare a calibration curve from the values
obtained. Calculate the content of polyphenols in
the sample from the absorbance using the
calibration curve.
Time
(min)
0.01
18
22
25
30
Phosphate buffer
(per cent)
95
75
75
95
95
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
5
25
25
5
5

analyte peak. Calculate the content of catechin in
Assay:
and reflux with water (50 ml x 3) on a water bath for
15 min each, cool and filter. Combine all the filtrates,
concentrate and make up the volume in a 100 ml
volumetric flask. Filter through 0.42 m membrane.
weighed, catechin RS in a 100 ml volumetric flask
and dissolve in about 50 ml of water and make up the
mixture of phosphate buffer (prepared by dissolving
0.14 g of potassium dihydrogen orthophosphate in
900 ml of water, adding 0.5 ml of orthophosphoric
ira hydro-alcoholic extract
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatogram of irahydroalcoholic extract with Catechin as RS

API Catechin RS
82
IRA WATER EXTRACT

254 nm
ira Water Extract is a dried and powdered

extract prepared from ira. The extract contains
not less than 10 per cent of total polyphenols
calculated as pyrogallol and not less than 0.1 per
cent of catechin when assayed.
Visible after
derivatisation
Rf
1.0
Take ira suitably sized (powder or pieces) in an
filtering the each time into the same vessel.
and sieve the powder through 500 m mesh to
obtain the extract and pack. The yield obtained is
about 17 per cent.
0.5
0.0
RS
T
RS
T
water extract
cent (Appendix 2.1.11) (Method-II).

silica gel 60F254 plate (Appendix 3.5) using catechin
as a reference standard. Test solution: Extract 2 g of
substance by refluxing with 50 ml of water for a
period of 15 min. Filter and concentrate the extract to
25 ml. Standard solution: Dissolve 10 mg of catechin
RS in 10 ml of methanol. Procedure: Apply 10 l
each of the test and standard solutions as bands at a
height of 10 mm from the base of a 10 x 5 cm TLC
plate using the mobile phase: toluene : ethyl acetate :
formic acid (1.2 : 1.8 : 1.0). Dry the plate in air and
examine under UV 254 nm. Spray the plate with fast
blue salt B reagent, and heat at 1050 till the colour of
the spots/bands appear without charring. The
chromatographic profile of the test solution shows a
band corresponding to that of the standard solution
(Fig. 1).
Other requirements:
prescribed limits, (Appendix 3.4).

(Appendix 3.7). Test solution: Always prepare
fresh solution. Take about 500 mg, accurately
weighed, of the substance being examined in a
100-ml round bottomed flask, reflux with 50 per
cent aqueous methanol (25 ml x 3) on water bath
83

for 15 min each, cool, filter and make up the

volume to 100 ml in a volumetric flask. Further
dilute 5 ml aliquot to 50 ml with water in a
volumetric flask. Filter through 0.42 m
membrane. Standard solution: Take about 100
mg, accurately weighed, pyrogallol RS in a 100ml volumetric flask and dissolve in about 50 ml
of 50 per cent aqueous methanol and make up to
100-ml with 50 per cent aqueous methanol.
Further dilute 5 ml to 50 ml with water in a
volumetric flask. Filter through 0.42 m
membrane. Procedure: Pipette out 2, 5, 7 and 10
ml of standard solution and 5, 7 ml of test solution
to different 100 ml volumetric flasks. Add 40 ml
of water, 5 ml of Folins reagent and 10 ml of 30.0
per cent sodium carbonate solution to each of the
volumetric flasks. Allow to stand for 30 min.
Make up the volume with water, shake and allow
to stand for 20 min. more. Read in a suitable
spectrophotometer at 750 nm using water as
blank. Prepare a calibration curve from the values
obtained. Calculate the content of polyphenols in
the sample from the absorbance using the
calibration curve.
Time
(min)
0.01
18
22
25
30
Phosphate buffer
(per cent)
95
75
75
95
95

standard solution and record the chromatogram.
analyte peak. Calculate the content of catechin in the
substance being examined from the peak response of
analyte. The test is not valid unless the relative
standard deviation for replicate injections is not more
than 2.0 per cent.
Assay:
ira water extract

Combine all the filtrates, concentrate and make
up the volume in a 100 ml volumetric flask. Filter
Take about 10 mg, accurately weighed, catechin
RS and in a 100-ml volumetric flask and dissolve
in about 50 ml of water and make up the volume
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatogram of ira water

extract with Catechin as RS

API Catechin RS
84
Acetonitrile
(per cent)
5
25
25
5
5
UH
arranged radially around numerous scattered,
collateral vascular bundles, each consisting of a few
unlignified, reticulate or spiral vessels upto about 70
in diameter, a group of phloem cells, unlignified, thinwalled, septate fibres upto about 30 wide and 600
long with small oblique slit like pits, numerous
scattered idioblasts, similar to those of cortex, and
associated with vascular bundles, also present,
idioblasts about 8-20 wide and up to 130 long with
dark reddish-brown contents: in single or in axial
rows, adjacent to vessels, parenchyma of cortex and
stele packed with flattened, rectangular, ovate, starch
grains, mostly 5-15 - 30-60 long about 25 wide
and 7 thick, marked by five transverse striations
uh consists of dried rhizome of Zingiber

officinale Roxb. (Fam. Zingiberaceae), widely
cultivated in India, rhizomes dug in JanuaryFebruary, buds and roots removed, soaked
overnight in water, decorticated, and some times
treated with lime and dried. uh contains not less
than 0.75 per cent of total gingerols (sum of 6gingerol, 8-gingerol, 10-gingerol and 6-shogaol)
when assayed.
Synonyms: Mahauadha,
Vivabheaja, agavera
Ngara,
Viv,

Adasuth, Aadar Shuth; Bengali: Suntha, Sunthi;
English: Ginger Root, Ginger; Gujarati: Sunth, Sundh,
Suntha; Hindi: Sonth; Kannada: Shunthi; Kashmiri:
Shonth; Malayalam: Chukku; Marathi: Sunth; Oriya:
Sunthi; Punjabi: Sund; Tamil: Sukku, Chukku;
Telugu: Sonthi, Sunthi; Urdu: Sonth, Zanjabeel
c) Powder:
Description:
a) Macroscopic:
Rhizome, laterally compressed bearing short,
flattish, ovate, oblique, branches on upper side each
having at its apex a depressed scar, pieces about 515 cm long, 1.5-6.5 cm wide (usually 3-4 cm) and
1-1.5 cm thick, externally buff coloured showing
longitudinal striations and occasional loose fibres,
fracture short, smooth, transverse surface exhibiting
narrow cortex (about one-third of radius), a wellmarked endodermis and a wide stele showing
numerousscattered fibro-vascular bundles and
yellow secreting cells, odour agreeable and
aromatic; taste agreeable and pungent
b) Microscopic:
Transverse section of rhizome shows cortex of
isodiametric thin-walled parenchyma with scattered
vascular strands and numerous isodiametric idioblasts,
about 40-80 in diameter containing a yellowish to
reddish-brown oleo-resin, endodermis slightly thick
walled, free from starch, immediately inside
endodermis a row of nearly cells, isodiametric
Fig. 1: Powdered drug of UH

(Zingiber officinale Roxb.)
Powder shows parenchyma cell groups containing
yellow brown oleo-resinous bodies; occur also as
fragments or in droplets. Starch grains abundant,
simple, ovoid or sac shaped upto 30-50 in length
and have a distinct hilum at the narrower end with
85
concentric striations; septate sclerenchymatous

lignified fibres in groups associated with vessels.
Vessels mostly non-lignified (Fig. 1)
chromatographic profile of the test solution shows

bands corresponding to that of the standard solution
(Fig. 2).
Identification:

(Appendix 2.1.9).
using 6-gingerol and 6-shogaol as reference
of 15 min. Filter and concentrate the extract to 25
ml. Standard solution: Dissolve 5 mg each of 6gingerol RS and 6-shogaol RS in about 25 ml of
the mobile phase: ethyl acetate : toluene : diethyl
ether (3.0 : 6.0 :1.0).
254 nm
Visible after
derivatisation
Other requirements:
Assay:
Take about 5 mg, accurately weighed, capsaicin
RS in 25-ml volumetric flask and dissolve in
about 10 ml of methanol and make up the volume.
volumes of acetonitrile, 44 volumes of 0.1 per
cent phosphoric acid and 1 volume of methanol.
Detection: UV 282 nm.
Rf
1.0
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
0.5
0.0
RS
RS
Fig. 2: Thin-Layer Chromatogram of uh

RS: (1) 6-Gingerol and (2) 6-Shogaol,
T: Test solution
Dry the plate in air and examine under UV 254 nm.
Spray the plate with anisaldehyde- sulphuric acid
86
API reference standards: API 6-Gingerol

RS, 6-Shogaol RS and Capsaicin RS
Constituents:
6-Shogaol,
6-gingerol,
zingiberol, - phellandrene, -zingiberene, arcurcumene, -bisabolene. Gingerenones A, B &
C, isogingerenone B, hexahydrocurcumin, diaryl
heptanoids, gingerdiols, 6-gingesulfonic acid,
gingerglycolipids A, B & C, gingerenones,
(+)-angelicoidenol-2-O--D-glucopyranoside,
geraniol glycosides, -santalol, -eudesmol,
nerolidol, farnesol, elemol, neral, geranial,
- and -pinene, camphene, sabinene, myrcene,
limonene, 1,8-cineole, aliphatic alkanes,
alcohols, aldehydes, ketones, sulphides
uh
Fig. 3: HPLC chromatogram of uh with

Capsaicin as RS

identify the peaks using the relative retention
times, as below.
Analyte
6-Gingerol
Capsaicin
8- Gingerol
10-Gingerol
6-Shogaol
Gua: Laghu, Snigdha; Vrya: Ua; Vipka:

Madhura; Karma: Anulomana, Dpana,
madoaghna, Hdya, Kaphaghna, Pcana,
Rucya, Vtakaphahara, Vya

0.8
1.0
1.6
4.0
2.04
Important formulations: Saubhgya va,

Saubhgyauh, Trikau, Vaivnara Cra
Therapeutic uses: Agnimndya (digestive

impairment), dhmna (flatulence with
gurguling sound), mavta (rheumatism), Gulma
(abdominal lump), Pu (anaemia), Pnasa
(Chronic rhinitis), lipada (filariasis), vsa
(dyspnoea), Udararoga (disease of abdomen)
Sum the peak areas of 6-gingerol, 8-gingerol, 10gingerol and 6-shogaol in the substance being
examined. Calculate the content of total gingerols
from the peak response of analytes. The test is not
87
UH HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT
heat at 1050 till the colour of the spots/bands
appear without charring. The chromatographic
profile of the test solution shows bands
corresponding to that of the standard solution
(Fig. 1).
uh Hydro-alcoholic Extract is a dried and

powdered extract prepared from uh
not less than 1.5 per cent of total gingerols (Sum
of 6-gingerol, 8-gingerol, 10-gingerol and 6shogaol) when assayed.
254 nm
Take uh suitably sized (powder or pieces) in
Rf
1.0
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
0.5
0.0
RS
T
RS
T
RS: (1) 6-Gingerol and (2) 6-Shogaol,
T: Test solution

(Method-I)

using 6-gingerol and 6-shogaol as reference
of 15 min. Filter and concentrate the extract to 25
ml. Standard solution: Dissolve 5 mg each of 6gingerol RS and 6-shogaol RS in about 25 ml of
using the mobilephase: ethyl acetate : toluene :
diethyl ether (3.0 : 6.0 :1.0). Dry the plate in air
and examine under UV 254 nm. Spray the plate
with anisaldehyde- sulphuric acid reagent and
Other requirements:
88
Visible after
derivatisation
Analyte
6-Gingerol
Capsaicin
8- Gingerol
10-Gingerol
6-Shogaol
Assay:
through 0.42 m membrane.

0.8
1.0
1.6
4.0
2.04
Sum the peak areas of 6-gingerol, 8-gingerol, 10gingerol and 6-shogaol in the substance being
uh Hydro-alcoholic extract

Fig. 2: HPLC chromatogram of uh

Hydro-alcoholic extract with Capsaicin as RS
API 6-Gingerol RS, 6-Shogaol RS and Capsaicin RS

weighed, capsaicin RS in 25-ml volumetric flask
up the volume. Filter through 0.42 m membrane.
cent orthophosphoric acid and 1 volume of
methanol. Injection volume: 20 l. Flow rate: 1
ml per min. Detection: UV 282 nm. Procedure:
Inject 20 l of the standard solution and record
the chromatogram. Inject 20 l of the test
solution, record the chromatogram and identify
the peaks using the relative retention times, as
below.
89
UH WATER EXTRACT
uh Water Extract is a dried and powdered
extract prepared from uh. The extract
contains not less than 0.2 per cent of total
gingerols (Sum of 6-gingerol, 8-gingerol, 10gingerol and 6-shogaol) when assayed.
Take uh suitably sized (powder or pieces) in an
254 nm
Rf
1.0
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
0.5
0.0
RS
RS

water extract
RS: (1) 6-Gingerol and (2) 6-Shogaol, T: Test
solution
(Method-II)

silica gel 60F254 plate (Appendix 3.5) using 6gingerol and 6-shogaol as reference standards. Test
solution: Extract 1 g of substance by refluxing with
50 ml of methanol for a period of 15 min. Filter and
concentrate the extract to 25 ml. Standard solution:
Dissolve 5 mg each of 6-gingerol RS and 6-shogaol
RS in about 25 ml of methanol. Procedure: Apply 10
l each of the test and standard solutions as bands at
a height of 10 mm from the base of a 10 x 5 cm TLC
plate using the mobile phase: ethyl acetate : toluene :
diethyl ether (3.0 : 6.0 :1.0). Dry the plate in air and
examine under UV 254 nm. Spray the plate with
anisaldehyde- sulphuric acid reagent and heat at 1050
till the colour of the spots/bands appear without
solution shows bands corresponding to that of the
Other requirements:
Assay:
90
Visible after
derivatisation

weighed, capsaicin RS in 25-ml volumetric flask
up the volume. Filter through 0.42 m membrane.
cent orthophosphoric acid and 1 volume of
methanol. Injection volume: 20 l. Flow rate: 1
ml per minu. Detection: UV 282 nm. Procedure:
solution, record the chromatogram and identify
the peaks using the relative retention times, as
below.
Analyte
6-Gingerol
Capsaicin
8- Gingerol
10-Gingerol
6-Shogaol
uh water extract
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatogram of uh

water extract with Capsaicin as RS

0.8
1.0
1.6
4.0
2.04

API 6-Gingerol RS, 6-Shogaol RS and Capsaicin RS
Sum the peak areas of 6-gingerol, 8-gingerol,

10-gingerol and 6-shogaol in the substance being
91
SVARAPATR
Svarapatr consists of dried leaflets of Cassia
senna L. syn. C. angustifolia L., (Fam.
Caesalpiniaceae), a small shrub, 60-75 cm high,
found throughout the year, cultivated largely in
southern India, especially in districts of
Tinnevelly, Madurai, Ramanathapuram and
collected and dried in shade for 7-10 days, till
they attain yellowish-green colour, graded and
then packed into large bales. It contains not less
than 0.2 per cent of sennoside A and 0.1 per cent
of sennoside B when assayed.
layers with spongy layer in between, palisade

cells of upper surface longer than those of lower
surface the latter having wavy anticlinal walls,
prismatic crystals of calcium oxalate present on
larger veins and clusters of calcium oxalate
crystals distributed throughout the palisade and
spongy tissues, midrib biconvex, bundles of
midrib and larger veins, incompletely surrounded
by a zone of pericyclic fibres and a crystal sheath
of parenchymatous cells containing prismatic
crystals of calcium oxalate
Synonyms: Mrkaik
c) Powder:

Sonamukhi; Bengali: Svarnamukhi, Sonapata;
English: Indian Senna, Tinnevelly Senna;
Gujarati: Mindhiaval; Hindi: Sanaya; Kannada:
Nelavarike, Sonamukhi; Kashmiri: Sna;
Malayalam: Sunnamukhi, Connamukhi; Marathi:
Sonamukhi; Oriya: Sunamukhi; Punjabi:
Sannamakhi, Sanapati, Sarnapatta; Tamil:
Nilavarai, Nelavakai; Telugu: Sunamukhi; Urdu:
Sena, Barg-e-Sana
Powder shows covering type of trichomes which

are short, thick, unicellular, warty and frequently
curved near the base. Rubiaceous or paracytic
type of stomata are characteristic. Calcium
oxalate cluster crystals occur in the cells of the
mesophyll and as prisms in a sheath of cells
around the fibres and as well freely distributed in
powder (Fig. 1.).
Description:
a) Macroscopic:
Leaflets 2.5-6 cm long and 7-15 mm wide at
centre, pale yellowish-green, elongated
lanceolate, slightly asymmetric at base, margins
entire, flat, apex acute with a sharp spine; both
surfaces smooth with sparse trichomes, odour,
faint but distinct, taste mucilagenous and
disagreeable
b) Microscopic:
Transverse section of a leaflet through midrib
shows an isobilateral structure, epidermal cells on
both surfaces straight walled, containing
mucilage; both surfaces bear scattered,
unicellular hair, often conical, curved near base,
thick-walled, non-lignified, warty cuticle,
stomata paracytic, numerous on both surfaces,
mesophyll consists of upper and lower palisade
Fig. 1: Powdered drug of SVARAPATR

(Cassia senna L.)
92

Identification:
than 14.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.5); Acidinsoluble ash: not more than 2.0 per cent
(Appendix 2.1.9)
sennoside A and sennoside B as reference
standards. Test solution: Extract 0.2 g of substance
by refluxing with 50 ml of methanol for a period of
10-15 min. Filter and concentrate the extract to
sennoside A RS and sennoside B RS in about 10 ml
of methanol. Procedure: Apply 10 l each of the
test and standard solutions as bands at a height of 10
the mobile phase ethyl acetate : methanol : water
(7.7 : 1.7 : 1.0). Dry the plate in air and examine
under UV 366 nm. The chromatographic profile of
the test solution shows bands corresponding to that
Other requirements:
Assay:
examined and reflux with mixture of 0.05 M
potassium dihydrogen orthophosphate and water
(5 ml : 10 ml x 3) on a water bath for 15 min each,
cool and filter. Combine all the filtrates and
transfer to a 50-ml volumetric flask, make up the
accurately weighed, each of sennoside A RS and

sennoside B RS in a 25-ml volumetric flask,
dissolve in about 5 ml of 0.05 M Potassium
dihydrogen orthophosphate and 10 ml of water
and make up the volume with water. Filter
system:
High
performance
liquid
Chromatography. Column and stationary phase:
Filtered and degassed mixture of 83 volumes of 1
per cent acetic acid in water and 17 volumes of
acetonitrile. Injection volume: 20 l. Flow rate: 2
solution, record the chromatogram and measure
the response for the analyte peaks. Calculate the
content of sennoside A and sennoside B in the
366 nm
Rf
1.0
(1)
0.5
(2)
0.0
RS (1) RS (2)

Svarapatr RS: (1) Sennoside A and (2)
Sennoside B; T: Test solution
93
of analytes. The test is not valid unless the relative

API Sennoside A RS and Sennoside B RS
Constituents:
Bioactive anthraquinone
glycosides viz., sennoside A, B, C and D; total
anthraquinone derivatives occur in the range of 2
to 3 per cent. Palmidin A, aloe-emodin
dianthrone-diglycoside,
rhein-anthrone-8glycoside, rhein-8-diglucoside, aloe-emodin-8glucoside, aloe-emodin-anthrone-diglucoside, a
primary glycoside having greater potency than
sennosides A and B, naphthalene glycoside
tinnevellin glucoside, sennoside G; kaempferol,
its glucoside kaempferin and isorhamnetin,
water-soluble polysaccharides
Svarapatr
Fig. 3: HPLC chromatograms of Svarapatr

with Sennoside A and Sennoside B as RS
Properties and Action: Rasa: Kau, Tikta,
Kaya; Gua: Laghu, Rka, Tka; Vrya:

Ua; Vipka: Kau; Karma: Recana,
Kuhaghna
Important formulations: Pacasakra

cra, Srivdysava
Therapeutic uses: Gulma (abdominal lump),

Udararoga (disease of abdomen), Vibandha
(constipation)

Dose: Cra (powder): 0.5 to 2 g
94
SVARAPATR HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT

366 nm
Svarapatr Hydro-Alcoholic Extract is a dried

and powdered extract prepared from Svarapatr
not less than 2.0 per cent of sum of sennoside A
and sennoside B when assayed.
Rf
1.0
Take Svarapatr suitably sized (powder or
exceeding 60-650 till the moisture is below 5 per
(1)
(2)
0.0
RS (1) RS (2) T
Svarapatr hydro-alcoholic extract
RS: (1) Sennoside A and (2) Sennoside B
T: Test solution

using sennoside A and sennoside B as reference
standards. Test solution: Extract 0.2 g of
substance by refluxing with 50 ml of methanol for
a period of 10-15 min. Filter and concentrate the
extract to 25 ml. Standard solution: Dissolve 5 mg
each of sennoside A RS and sennoside B RS in
each of the test and standard solutions as bands at
a height of 10 mm from the base of a 10 x 5 cm
of the plate using the mobile phase: ethyl acetate
: methanol : water (7.7 : 1.7 : 1.0). Dry the plate
solution (Fig. 1).
Other requirements:
Assay:
95
0.5

cool and filter. Combine all the filtrates and transfer
to a 50-ml volumetric flask, make up the volume
weighed, each of sennoside A RS and sennoside B
RS in a 25-ml volumetric flask, dissolve in about
5 ml of 0.05 M Potassium dihydrogen
orthophosphate and 10 ml of water and make up the
performance liquid Chromatography. Column and
Mobile phase: Filtered and degassed mixture of 83
volumes of 1 per cent acetic acid in water and
17 volumes of acetonitrile. Injection volume: 20 l.
Flow rate: 2 ml per min. Detection: UV 350 nm.
Procedure: Inject 20 l of the standard solution and
record the chromatogram. Inject 20 l of the test
solution, record the chromatogram and measure the
response for the analyte peaks. Calculate the content
of sennoside A and sennoside B in the substance
being examined from the peak response of analytes.
The test is not valid unless the relative standard
2.0 per cent.
Svarapatr hydro-alcoholic extract
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatograms of

Svarapatr hydro-alcoholic extract with
Sennoside A and Sennoside B as RS

96
SVARAPATR WATER EXTRACT

366 nm
Svarapatr water Extract is a dried and

powdered extract prepared from Svarapatr. The
extract contains not less than 1.0 per cent of sum
of sennoside A and sennoside B when assayed.
Rf
1.0
(1)
Take Svarapatr suitably sized (powder or

exceeding 60-650 till the moisture is below 5 per
0.5
(2)
0.0
RS (1) RS (2) T
Svarapatr water extract
RS: (1) Sennoside A and (2) Sennoside B
T: Test solution
Quantative parameters:

(Method-II)

using sennoside A and sennoside B as reference
standards. Test solution: Extract 0.2 g of
substance by refluxing with 50 ml of methanol for
a period of 10-15 min. Filter and concentrate the
extract to 25 ml. Standard solution: Dissolve 5 mg
each of sennoside A RS and sennoside B RS in
each of the test and standard solutions as bands at
a height of 10 mm from the base of a 10 x 5 cm
of the plate using the mobile phase: ethyl acetate
: methanol : water (7.7 : 1.7 : 1.0). Dry the plate
solution (Fig. 1).
Other requirements:
Assay:
97

cool and filter. Combine all the filtrates and
transfer to a 50-ml volumetric flask, make up the
accurately weighed, each of sennoside A RS and
sennoside B RS in a 25-ml volumetric flask,
dissolve in about 5 ml of 0.05 M potassium
dihydrogen orthophosphate and 10 ml of water
and make up the volume with water. Filter
system:
High
performance
liquid
Chromatography. Column and stationary phase:
Filtered and degassed mixture of 83 volumes of 1
per cent acetic acid in water and 17 volumes of
acetonitrile. Injection volume: 20 l. Flow rate: 2
solution, record the chromatogram and measure
the response for the analyte peaks. Calculate the
content of sennoside A and sennoside B in the
Svarapatr water extract
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatograms of

Svarapatr water extract with
Sennoside A and Sennoside B as RS

98
TULAS
Lamina - epidermis and trichomes similar to those of
petiole on both surfaces; stomata anomocytic and
diacytic present on both surfaces and slightly raised
above the level of epidermis; palisade single layered
followed by 4-6 layers of closely packed spongy
parenchyma with chloroplasts and oleo-resin;
stomatal index 10-13-15 on upper surface and 14-1516 on lower surface; palisade ratio 3.8; vein islet
number 31-33
c) Powder:
Tulas consists of dried leaf of Ocimum

tenuiflorum L. syn. O. sanctum L. (Fam.
Lamiaceae), an erect, 30-60 cm high, much
branched annual herb, found throughout the
country and cultivated in sacred groves. It
contains not less than 0.4 per cent of sum of
oleanolic acid and ursolic acid when assayed.
Synonyms: Suras, Surasa
Tulasi; Bengali: Tulasi; English: Sacred Basil,
Holy Basil; Gujarati: Tulasi, Tulsi; Hindi: Tulasi;
Kannada: Tulasi; Malayalam: Tulasi; Marathi:
Tulas; Punjabi: Tulasi; Tamil: Thulasi, Tulasi;
Telugu: Tulasi; Urdu: Raihan, Tulsi
a) Macroscopic:
Leaves 2.5-5 cm long, 1.6-3.2 cm wide, ellipticoblong, obtuse or acute, entire or serrate, pubescent
on both surfaces, petiolate, thin, petiole 1.5-3 cm
long, hairy; odour aromatic; taste, characteristic
Fragment of lower Fragments of simple

epidermis with
trichomes
glandular trichome
and spongy mesophyll
cells
b) Microscopic:
Leaf- Petiole - shows cordate outline, consisting of
single layered epidermis composed of thin walled,
oval cells having a number of covering and glandular
trichomes; covering trichomes multicellular,
uniseriate 1-8 celled long, rarely slightly reflexed at
tip; glandular trichomes short, sessile or with 1-2
celled stalk, and 2-8 celled, balloon-shaped head,
enclosed in a cuticular bladder, measuring 22-27 in
dia., upper epidermis, followed by 3-4 layers of
collenchymatous and 1-2 layers of parenchymatous
cells; lower epidermis followed by 1-3 layers of
collenchymatous and 2-3 layers of parenchymatous
cells; three vascular bundles situated centrally, middle
one larger than the other two, consisting of xylem and
phloem
Glandular trichomes
with stalk
Surface view of epidermis with trichomes from the

midrib portion
0.01mm
Epidermis in surface
view
Midrib - epidermis, trichomes and vascular bundles

similar to those of petiole, except reduced in cortical
layers towards apical region of midrib
Epidermis in surface
view with diacytic
stomata
Upper epidermis in surface view with glandular

trichomes
0.01mm
Fig. 1: Powdered drug of Tulas (Ocimum

tenuiflorum L.)
99
Glandular
trichomes in
surface view
Fragment of lamina
showing upper epidermis
with glandular trichome,
palisade and spongy
mesophyll cells
Description:-
Light-green; shows fragments of polygonal, wavy

to sinuous walled upper and lower epidermal cells
in surface view, covering and glandular trichomes
as a whole or in pieces, palisade and spongy
parenchyma, anomocytic and diacytic stomata
(Fig 1.)

(Appendix 2.1.9).

Identification:
using ursolic acid as a reference standard. Test
Standard solution: Dissolve 5 mg of ursolic acid
RS in about 25 ml of methanol.
Other requirements:

Rf
1.0
Assay:
weighed, each of oleanolic acid RS and ursolic
in about 15 ml of methanol and make up the
volume with methanol. Filter through 0.42 m
and stationary phase: C18 (250 mm x 4.6 mm).
volume of water and 9 volumes of methanol.
0.5
0.0
RS
T
Fig. 2: Thin-Layer Chromatogram of Tulas
RS: Ursolic acid, T: Test solution
acetic acid (8.0 : 2.0 : 0.1). Dry the plate in air.
Spray the plate with anisaldehyde - sulphuric acid
100

response for the analyte peaks. Calculate the
content of oleanolic acid and ursolic acid in the
Constituents: Essential oil containing eugenol,

-caryophyllene;
apigenin, apigenin-7-Oglucuronide, vicenin, vicenin-2, luteolin, luteolin7-O-glucuronide,
galuteolin,
orientin,
molludistin, cirsilineol; gallic acid and its methyl
and ethyl esters; ursolic acid. -carotene;
rosmarinic, protocatechuic, vanillic, 4hydroxybenzoic, caffeic, chlorogenic acids; fatty
acids;
vanillin,
4-hydroxybenzaldehyde,
cholesterol, campesterol, stigmasterol, sitosterol

Gua: Laghu, Rka, Tka; Vrya: Ua;
Vipka: Kau; Karma: Dpana, Hdya,
Jvaraghna, Ksahara, Kmighna, Kaphahara,
Rasyana, vsahara, Vtahara
Tulas
Important formulations:
Mnasamitra vaaka, Mahjvarkua rasa,
Muktpachmta rasa, Tribhuvanakrti rasa
Therapeutic uses:
Fig. 3: HPLC chromatograms of Tulas with

Oleanolic acid and Ursolic acid as RS
Apasmra (epilepsy), Aruci (tastelessness),

Gulma (abdominal lump), Kata (wound), Hikk
(hiccup), Ksa (cough), Kmiroga (helminthiasis
/ worm infestation), Kaya (pthisis), Kuha
(disease of skin), Prvala (intercostal
neuralgia and pleurodynia), Plh (splenic
disease), Pratiyya (coryza), vsa (dyspnoea),
oa (cachexia)
Dose:
Cra (powder): 1-3 g
API Oleanolic acid RS and Ursolic acid RS
101
TULAS HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT

Tulas Hydro-Alcoholic Extract is a dried and
powdered extract prepared from Tulas
not less than 0.2 per cent of sum of oleanolic acid
and ursolic acid when assayed.

1.0
Rf
Take Tulas suitably sized (powder or pieces) in
0.5
0.0
RS
T
Fig. 1: Thin-Layer Chromatogram of Tulas
Quantative parameters:
Not less than 90.0 per cent (Appendix 2.1.11)
(Method-I)

RS in about 25 ml of methanol. Procedure: Apply
10 l each of the test and standard solutions as
bands at a height of 10 mm from the base of a 10
x 5 cm TLC plate and develop up to 8 cm from
the base of the plate using the mobile phase:
toluene : ethyl acetate : acetic acid (8.0 : 2.0 : 0.1).
Dry the plate in air. Spray the plate with
anisaldehyde - sulphuric acid reagent and heat at
Other requirements:
Assay:
102

Tulas hydro-alcoholic extract
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatograms of Tulas

hydro-alcoholic extract with Oleanolic acid
and Ursolic acid as RS

103
TULAS HYDRO-ALCOHOLIC EXTRACT

Tulas Water Extract is a dried and powdered

extract prepared from Tulas. The extract
contains not less than 0.02 per cent of sum of
oleanolic acid and ursolic acid when assayed.
1.0
R
f
Take Tulas suitably sized (powder or pieces) in

0.5
0.0
RS
T
Fig. 1: Thin-Layer Chromatogram of water extract
(Method-II)

RS in about 25 ml of methanol. Procedure: Apply
10 l each of the test and standard solutions as
bands at a height of 10 mm from the base of a 10
x 5 cm TLC plate and develop up to 8 cm from
the base of the plate using the mobile phase:
toluene : ethyl acetate : acetic acid (8.0 : 2.0 : 0.1).
Dry the plate in air. Spray the plate with
anisaldehyde- sulphuric acid reagent and heat at
Other requirements:
Assay:
104



Tulas water extract
Fig. 2: HPLC chromatograms of Tulas

water extract with Oleanolic acid and Ursolic
acid as RS
105
APPENDICES
API, Part-I, Vol.-IX (Extracts); Appendices
APPENDIX - 1
1.1. APPARATUS FOR TESTS AND ASSAYS
125
106
90
75
63
53
45
1.1.1 Nessler Cylinders

Nessler cylinders which are used for comparative
tests are matched tubes of clear colourless glass with
a uniform internal diameter and flat, transparent
base. These comply with Indian Standard 41611967 and are of transparent glass with a nominal
capacity of 50 ml. The overall height is about 150
mm, the external height to the 50 ml mark 110 to
124 mm, the thickness of the wall 1.0 to 1.5 mm and
the thickness of the base 1.5 to 3.0 mm. The external
height to the 50 ml mark of the cylinder used for a
test must not vary by more than 1 mm.
120
150
170
200
240
300
350
Designation
Test sieves of metal wire cloth are designated by
the nominal size of aperture of the wire cloth,
followed by the inscription IS Sieve.
Examples:
a. 5.60 mm IS Sieve
b. 425 m IS Sieve
1.1.2. Sieves
Sieves for pharmacopoeial testing are constructed
from wire cloth with square meshes, woven from
wire of brass, bronze, stainless steel or any other
suitable material. The wires should be of uniform
circular cross-section and should not be coated or
plated. There must be no reaction between the
material of the sieve and the substance being sifted.
Nominal aperture sizes of 1 mm and above, as

well as their associated tolerances and wire
diameters, are expressed in millimeters (mm) and
for aperture sizes smaller than 1 mm, these are
expressed in micrometers (m).
Sieves conform to the following specifications
Unless otherwise specified, thermometers suitable

for pharmacopoeial tests conform to Indian Standard
4825-1968 and are standardised in accordance with
the Indian Standard Method of Calibrating Liquidin-Glass Thermometers, 6274-1971.
IS 460 (Pt I) 1985

(Reaffirmed 1998)
mm
4.0
2.8
2.0
1.7
1.4
1.0
m
710
600
500
425
355
250
180
150
1.1.3. Thermometers
IS 460-1978
-4
6
8
10
12
16
-22
25
30
36
44
60
85
100
The thermometers are of the mercury-in-glass

type and are filled with a dried inert gas,
preferably nitrogen. They may be standardised for
total immersion or for partial immersion. Each
thermometer should be employed according to
the condition of immersion under which it was
standardised. In the selection of the thermometer
it is essential to consider the conditions under
which it is to be used.
1.1.4 Ultraviolet Lamp (For general purposes
and for chromatography work)
An instrument consisting of mercury vapour lamp
and a filter which gives an emission band with
maximum intensity at about 254 nm (near UV
109
1.1.6. Weights and Balances
rays) and 366 nm (far UV rays) is used. To ensure

that the required emission is being given by the
lamp, carry out the following test periodically.
Apply to a plate coated with silica gel G, 5 l of a
0.04 per cent w/v solution of sodium salicylate in
ethanol (95 per cent) for lamps of maximum
output at 254 nm and 5 l of a 0.2 per cent w/v
solution in ethanol (95 per cent) for lamps of
maximum output at 365 nm. Examine the spot in
a position normal to the radiation. The distance
between the lamp and the plate under examination
used in a pharmacopoeial test should not exceed
the distance used to carry out the above test.
Pharmacopoeial tests and assays require the use

of analytical balances that vary in capacity,
sensitivity and reproducibility. The accuracy
needed for a weighing should dictate the type of
balance. Where substances are to be accurately
weighed, the weighing is to be performed so as to
limit the error to not more than 0.1 per cent. For
example, a quantity of 50 mg is to be weighed to
the nearest 0.05 mg; a quantity of 0.1 g is to be
weighed to the nearest 0.1 mg; and quantity of 10
g is to be weighed to the nearest 10 mg. A balance
should be chosen such that the value of three
times the standard deviation of the reproducibility
of the balance, divided by the amount to be
weighed, does not exceed 0.001.
1.1.5. Volumetric Glassware

Volumetric apparatus is normally calibrated at 27.
However, the temperature generally specified for
measurements of volume in the analytical
operations of the pharmacopoeia, unless otherwise
stated, is 25. The discrepancy is inconsequential
as long as the room temperature in the laboratory
is reasonably constant and is around 27.
Pharmacopoeial assays involving volumetric
measurements require the use of accurately
calibrated glassware. Volumetric apparatus must
be suitably designed to assure accuracy. The
design, construction and capacity of volumetric
glassware should be in accordance with those laid
down by the Bureau of Indian Standards. The
tolerances on capacity for volumetric flasks,
pipettes and burettes, as laid down in the relevant
Indian Standards, are permissible.
110
APPENDIX - 2
2.1. TESTS AND DETERMINATIONS
Chlorinated Soda Solution (Bleaching

Solution): Dissolve 75 g of sodium carbonate in
125 ml of distilled water; triturate 50 g of
chlorinated lime (bleaching powder) in a mortar
with 75 ml of distilled water, adding it little by little.
Mix the two liquids and shake occasionally for three
or four hours. Filter and store, protected from light.
Used for lightening highly coloured material, by
warming in it and washing the tissues thoroughly.
2.1.1 Microscopic Identification of Botanical

Substances:
Microscopic identification of the botanical
ingredients is a standard for statutory purposes in
several monographs. Appropriate processing for
separation and isolation with suitable clearing
reagents and stains, and finally mounting a little
part on a slide that helps to show the unit structures
is to be followed. Identification of the discrete, but
disoriented units will not be possible without
proper isolation and should not be attempted.
Breamers Reagent: Dissolve 1 g of sodium

tungstate and 2 g of sodium acetate in sufficient
quantity of water to make 10 ml. Yellowish to
brown precipitates; indicate the presence of tannins.
Monographs where the test is prescribed give

both a relevant method of isolation and diagnostic
features specific to the expected ingredient. Only
a brief method and a few of the characteristics for
each ingredient are given, but an analyst may use
other methods of isolation and choose more
characteristics to draw a correct conclusion.
Canada Balsam (as a Mountant): Heat Canada

balsam on a water bath until volatile matter is
removed and the residue sets to a hard mass on
cooling. Dissolve residue in xylene to form a thin
syrupy liquid. Used for making permanent
mounts of reference slides of selected debris.
Chloral Hydrate Solution: Dissolve 50 g of
chloral hydrate in 20 ml of distilled water. A
valuable clarifying agent for rendering tissues
transparent and clear, by freeing them from most
of the ergastic substances, but leaving calcium
oxalate crystals unaffected.
1. Stains and Reagents for Microchemical

Reactions:
For the purpose of identification and
characterization of materials expected to be
included in the prescribed standards, the
following stains and reagents are recommended
for use wherever relevant, in addition to those
mentioned in the monograph.
Chloral Iodine: Saturate chloral hydrate solution

with iodine, leaving a few crystals undissolved;
useful for detecting min grains of starch otherwise
undetectable.
Acetic Acid: Dilute 6 ml of glacial acetic acid with

100 ml of distilled water; used for identification of
cystoliths, which dissolve with effervescence.
Chlorziniciodine (Iodinated Zinc Chloride

Solution): Dissolve 20 g of zinc chloride and 6.5
g of potassium iodide in 10 ml of distilled water.
Add 0.5 g of iodine and shake for about fifteen
min before filtering. Dilute, if needed, prior to
use. Renders cellulosic walls bluish violet and
lignified walls yellowish brown to brown.
Aniline Chloride Solution: Dissolve 2 g in a

mixture of 65 ml of 30 per cent ethyl alcohol and
15 ml distilled water and add 2 ml of conc.
hydrochloric acid. Lignified tissues are stained
bright yellow.
Bismarck Brown: Dissolve 1 g in 100 ml of 95
per cent of ethyl alcohol; used as a general stain
for macerated material (with Schultzes).
Chromic Acid Solution: 10 g of potassium

chromate dissolved in 90 ml of dilute sulphuric
acid. A macerating agent similar to Schultzes.
111
water, add 2 g of iodine to the solution and

dissolved it; stains lignified walls yellow and
cellulosic walls blue.
Corallin Soda: Dissolve 5 g of corallin in 100 ml

of 90 per cent ethyl alcohol. Dissolve 25 g of
sodium carbonate in 100 ml distilled water; keep
the solutions separate and mix when required, by
adding 1 ml of the corallin solution to 20 ml of
the aqueous sodium carbonate solution. Prepare
fresh each time, as the mixture will not keep for
long. Used for staining sieve plates and callus
bright pink and imparts a reddish tinge to starch
grains and lignified tissues.
Lactophenol (Ammans Fluid): Phenol 20 g,

lactic acid 20 g, glycerin 40 g, dissolved in
distilled water 20 ml; reveals starch grains in
polarised light with a well-marked cross at hilum,
and also min crystals of calcium oxalate as
brightly polarising points of light.
Methylene Blue: A solution of 0.1 g of
methylene blue in 25 ml of ethyl alcohol (95 per
cent). A general stain for nucleus and bacteria.
Cuoxam (Ammoniacal Solution of Copper

Oxide): Triturate 0.5 g of copper carbonate in a
mortar with 10 ml of distilled water and gradually
add 10 ml of strong solution of ammonia (sp. gr.
0.880) with continued stirring; used for dissolving
cellulosic materials.
Millons Reagent: Dissolve one volume of

mercury in 9 volumes of fuming nitric acid
(sp. gr. 1.52), keeping the mixture well cooled
during reaction. Add equal volume distilled water
when cool. Stains proteins red.
Eosin: 1 per cent solution in 90 per cent ethyl

alcohol; stains cellulose and aleurone grains red.
Naphthol Solution: Dissolve 10 g of naphthol

in 100 ml of ethyl alcohol; a specific stain for
detection of inulin; cells containing inulin turn
deep reddish violet.
Ferric Chloride Solution: A 5 per cent solution of

ferric chloride in distilled water. Taninns containing
tissues coloured bluish or greenish black.
Glycerin: Pure or diluted as required with one or
two volumes of distilled water. Used as a general
mountant.
Phloroglucinol: 1g of phloroglucinol dissolved

in 100 ml of 90 per cent ethyl alcohol; mount
debris in a few drops, allow to react for a min,
draw off excess of reagent with a filter paper strip
and add a drop of conc. hydrochloric acid to the
slide; lignified tissues acquire a deep purplish red
colour; very effective on water washed material
but not in chloral hydrate washed debris, for
which alcoholic solution of safranin is more
effective (See Safranin).
Haematoxylin, Delafields: Prepare a saturated

solution of ammonia alum. To 100 ml of this add a
solution of one g of haematoxylin in 6 ml of ethyl
alcohol (97 per cent). Leave the mixed solution
exposed to air and light in an unstopped bottle for
three or four days. Filter and add to the filtrate 25
ml of glycerin and 25 ml of methyl alcohol. Allow
the solution to stand exposed to light, till it acquires
a dark colour (about two months). Refilter and
store as a stock solution. Dilute it 3 or 4 times
volumes with distilled water. Stains cellulosic
fibers blue; used only on water washed material.
Picric Acid Solution (Trinitrophenol Solution):

A saturated aqueous solution made by dissolving 1
g of picric acid in 95 ml of distilled water; stains
animal and insect tissues, a light to deep yellow; in
a solution with ethyl alcohol, aleurone grains and
fungal hyphae are stained yellow.
Iodine Water: Mix one volume of decinormal

iodine with 4 volumes of distilled water. Stains
starch blue, and reveals crystalloids and globoids
when present in aleurone grains.
Potash, Caustic: A 5 per cent aqueous solution;

used to separate tenacious tissues of epidermis and
also laticiferous elements and vittae, both of
which are stained brown.
Iodine in Potassium Iodide Solution: Dissolve

1 g of potassium iodide in 200 ml of distilled
112
Foreign matter consists of any organism, part or

product of an organism, other than that named in
the definition of the product and mineral
admixtures, such as soils, stones, sand and dust. It
shall also include other than official parts of
organism beyond their specified limits.
Ruthenium Red: Dissolve 0.008 g of ruthenium

red in 10 ml of a 10 per cent solution of lead
acetate; (to be freshly prepared) used for
identification of most kinds of mucilage
containing tissues, which turn pink. A 0.0008 g
ruthenium red dissolved in 10 ml of distilled
water and used immediately stains cuticular
tissues in debris to a light pink.
Take 100 g of sample (unless otherwise specified)

and spread in a thin layer on a suitable platform.
Examine in daylight with unawed eye or using 6 x
or 10 x magnifying glass and separate the foreign
matter. Appropriate sieve can also be used to
separate the foreign matter. Dust regarded as
mineral admixture is separated by sifting the
sample through a 250 m sieve. Weigh the sorted
foreign matter and calculate the foreign matter
content in per cent with reference to drug sample.
Safranin: A one per cent solution in 50 per cent

ethyl alcohol; used to stain lignified cell walls
deep red, even after clearing with chloral hydrate.
Schultzes Maceration Fluid: Add isolated
debris to 50 per cent conc. nitric acid in a test tube
and warm over water bath: add a few crystals of
potassium chlorate while warming, till tissues
soften; cool, wash with water thoroughly and
tease out for mounting hard tissues; isolated cell
structures are clearly revealed, but the structures
are not useful for measurement of dimensions.
2.1.4. Determination of Moisture Content

(Loss on Drying):
Dry the evaporating dish for 30 min under the
same conditions to be employed in the
determination. Place about 5 to 10 g of
powder/drug accurately weighed in a tared
evaporating dish. For unpowdereded drug,
prepare about 10 g of the sample by cutting,
shredding so that the parts are about 3 mm in
thickness. Seeds and fruits, smaller than 3 mm
should be cracked. Avoid the use of high speed
mills in preparing the samples, and exercise care
that no appreciable amount of moisture is lost
during preparation and that the portion taken is
representative of the official sample. By gentle,
sidewise shaking, distribute the test specimen as
evenly as practicable to a depth of about 5 mm
generally, and not more than 10 mm in the case of
bulky materials. Place the loaded bottle in the
drying chamber. Dry the test specimen at 1050 for
3 hours and weigh. Continue the drying and
weighing at half an hour interval until difference
between two successive weighing corresponds to,
Schweitzers Reagent: Same as Ammoniacal

Copper Oxide Solution (Cuoxam).
Sudan Red II I: Dissolve 0.01 g of sudan red
III in 5 ml of ethyl alcohol (90 per cent) and 5 ml
of pure glycerin; suberised walls of cork cells, and
fatty material in cells are stained bright red.
Sulphovanadic Acid (Mandelins Reagent):
Triturate one g of ammonium vandate with 100 ml
conc. sulphuric acid. Allow the deposit to subside
and use the clear liquid. This is to be prepared
fresh; useful for identification of alkaloids,
particularly strychnine which turns violet in the
cells containing it.
2.1.2. Net Content:
The content of the final or retail pack shall be not
less than 98 per cent of the declared net content.
2.1.3. Determination of Foreign Matter
A. Foreign Matter
The sample shall be free from visible signs of
mould growth, sliminess, contamination by insects
and other animal and animal products including
animal excreta or any other noxious foreign matter.
2.1.5. Determination of Total Ash:

Incinerate about 2 to 3 g, accurately weighed, of the
ground drug in a tared platinum or silica dish at a
113
temperature not exceeding 6000 until free from

carbon, cool in a desiccator for 30 min and weigh
without delay. If carbon free ash cannot be obtained
in this way, exhaust the charred mass with hot water,
collect the residue on an ashless filter paper,
incinerate the residue and filter paper, add the filtrate,
evaporate to dryness, and ignite at a temperature not
exceeding 6000. Calculate the percentage of ash with
reference to the air-dried drug.
Calculate the percentage of alcohol-soluble

extractive with reference to the air-dried drug.
2.1.9. Determination
Extractive:
of
Water-soluble
Proceed as directed for the determination of

Alcohol-soluble extractive, using chloroform
water (2.5 ml chloroform in purified water to
produce 1000 ml) instead of ethanol.
2.1.6. Determination of Water-Soluble Ash:
2.1.10. Determination of pH Value:
Boil the ash obtained in (2.1.5) for 5 min with 25 ml

of water; collect insoluble matter in a Gooch crucible,
or on an ashless filter paper (Whatman 41), wash
with hot water, and ignite for 15 min at a temperature
not exceeding 4500. Substract the weight of the
insoluble matter from the weight of the ash; the
difference in weight represents the water-soluble ash.
Calculate the percentage of water-soluble ash with
The pH value of an aqueous liquid may be defined

as the common logarithm of the reciprocal of the
hydrogen ion concentration expressed in g per
litre. For the purpose of pharmacopoeia pH is
defined as the value given by a suitable, properly
standardized, pH meter capable of reproducing
pH values to 0.05 pH unit using an indicator
electrode sensitive to hydrogen ion activity, the
glass electrode and a suitable reference electrode.
The instrument should be capable of sensing the
potential across the electrode pair and for pH
standardization purposes, applying an adjustable
potential to the circuit by manipulation of
standardization, zero, asymmetry, or
calibration control, and should be able to control
the change in millivolts per unit change in pH
reading through a temperature and/or slope
control. Measurements are made at 25 20, unless
otherwise specified.
2.1.7. Determination of Acid-insoluble Ash:

To the crucible containing total ash, add dropwise
25 ml of dilute hydrochloric acid. Collect the
insoluble matter on an ashless filter paper
(Whatman 41) and wash with hot water until the
filtrate is neutral. Transfer the filter paper
containing the insoluble matter to the original
crucible, dry on a hot plate and ignite to constant
weight. Allow the residue to cool in a suitable
desiccator for 30 min and weigh without delay.
Calculate the content of acid-insoluble ash with
2.1.8. Determination
Extractive:
of
To standardize the pH meter, select two Buffer

Solutions whose difference in pH does not exceed
4 units such that the expected pH of the material
under test falls between them. Commercially
available buffer solutions for pH meter
standardization, having traceability to the
National Standards can be used.
Alcohol-soluble
Macerate 5 g of the air dried drug, coarsely

powdered, with 100 ml of alcohol of specified
strength in a closed flask for 24 hours, shaking
frequently during 6 hours and allowing to stand for
18 hours. Filter rapidly, taking precautions against
loss of solvent, evaporate 25 ml of the filtrate to
dryness in a tared flat bottomed shallow dish and
dry at 1050, to constant weight and weigh.
Fill the cell with one of the Buffer Solutions for

Standardization at the temperature at which the
test material is to be measured. Set the
temperature control at the temperature of the
solution, and adjust the calibration control to
make the observed pH value identical with that of
the declared pH. Rinse the electrodes and cell
114
with several portions of the second Buffer

Solution for Standardization, then fill the cell
with it, at the same temperature as the material to
be measured. The pH of the second buffer
solution is within 0.07 pH unit of the declared
value. If a larger deviation is noted, examine the
electrodes and if they are faulty, replace them.
Repeat the standardization until both Buffer
Solutions for Standardization give observed pH
values within 0.05 pH unit of the declared value
without further adjustment of the controls.
Replace the aqueous ethanol with water and

follow the procedure as given in Method- I.
2.1.12. Determination of Volatile Oil in Drugs
The determination of volatile oil in a drug is made
by distilling the drug with a mixture of water and
glycerin, collecting the distillate in a graduated
tube in which the aqueous portion of the distillate
is automatically separated and returned to the
distilling flask and measuring the volume of the
oil. The content of the volatile oil is expressed as
a percentage v/w.
When the system is functioning satisfactorily, rinse

the electrodes and cell several times with a few
portions of the test material, fill the cell with the test
material, and read the pH value. Use carbon dioxidefree water for solution or dilution of test material in
pH determinations. In all pH measurements, allow a
sufficient time for stabilization.
The apparatus consists of the following parts (See

Fig. 1). The apparatus described below is
recommended but any similar apparatus may be
used provided that it permits complete distillation
of the volatile oil. All glass parts of the apparatus
should be made of good quality resistance glass.
Unless otherwise specified in the monograph

prepare 5 per cent w/v of the sample. Filter if it is
not soluble completely and use the filtrate to
measure the pH.
2.1.11. Determination of Total Soluble
Solids: Method-I
Take about one g, accurately weighed, of the
substance being examined in a 100-ml volumetric
flask, dissolve in 50 ml of 50 per cent v/v aqueous
ethanol, sonicate for 10 min, heat on water bath
(avoiding evaporation), cool and dilute to 100 ml
with 50 per cent v/v aqueous ethanol. Mix and
quickly pipette out 25 ml solution to a tared glass
dish and evaporate. Centrifuge the remaining
liquid for 10 min at 3000 rpm. Pipette out 25 ml
of the supernatant obtained after centrifugation to
a tared glass dish and evaporate. After
evaporation of solvent, place the glass dishes in
oven at 1050 to dry to a constant weight. The
weight of residue obtained after centrifugation is
not less than 90 per cent of the weight of the
residue obtained before centrifugation.
Fig. 1: Apparatus for Volatile oil Content

determination
(a) Distilling Flask - A spherical flask, 1,000 ml
capacity with ground neck, taper of ground socket 1
in 10, internal dia. of larger end 34.35 to 34.65 mm
(b) Still Head - Graduated measuring tube and
return flow tube made in one piece, in accordance
with the following specifications. External
diameter of the smaller end 31.0 to 31.2 mm.
Minimum length of the ground zone -34 mm.
Determination of Total Soluble Solids:

Method-II
Tube AC, length -220 to 240 mm

115
Internal diameter -13 to 15 mm
pieces of porous earthen ware and one filter paper

15 cm cut into small strips, 7 to 12 mm wide, are
also put in the distilling flask, which is then
connected to the still head. Before attaching the
condenser, water is run into the graduated
receiver, keeping the tap T open until the water
overflows, at P. Any air bubbles in the rubber
tubing a-b are carefully removed by pressing the
tube. The tap is then closed and the condenser
attached. The contents of the flask are now heated
and stirred by frequent agitation until ebullition
commences. The distillation is continued at a rate
which keeps the lower end of the condenser cool.
The flask is rotated occasionally to wash down
any material that adheres to its sides.
Bulb CD, length -100 to 110 mm

Spiral Condenser - Ground joint accurately fitting
in the ground neck of the tube EG, taper 1 in 10
Tube EG, length -80 to 90 mm
Bulb B - length 20 to 22 mm
The distance between B and P is 120 to 125 mm.
Junction P and the centre of the bulb B must be in
the same horizontal plane.
Measuring tube JL - Length of the graduated
portion 144 to 155 mm capacity 2 milliliters
graduated into fifths and fiftieths of a milliliter.
At the end of the specified time (3 to 4 hours)

heating is discontinued, the apparatus is allowed to
cool for 10 min and the tap T is opened and the
tube L1 lowered slowly; as soon as the layer of the
oil completely enters into the graduated part of the
receiver the tap is closed and the volume is read.
Tube PL - Return flow tube - Internal diameter 7 to 8 mm

Levelling tube I, length -450 to 500 mm. Internal
diameter 10 to 12 mm tapering at the lower end
with a wide top (20 to 25 mm diameter).
The tube L1 is then raised till the level of water in

it is above the level of B, when the tap T is slowly
opened to return the oil to the bulb. The
distillation is again continued for another hour
and the volume of oil is again read, after cooling
the apparatus as before. If necessary, the
distillation is again continued until successive
readings of the volatile oil do not differ.
Rubber tubing a-b length 450 to 500 mm.

Internal diameter 5 to 8 mm.
(c) Burner - A luminous Argand burner with
chimney and sensitive regulative tap.
(d) Stand - A retort stand with asbestos covered
ring and clamp carrying a piece of metal tubing
connected by a short length of rubber tubing with
the water inlet tube of the condenser jacket.
The measured yield of volatile oil is taken to be the

content of volatile oil in the drug.
The dimensions of the apparatus may be suitably
modified in case of necessity.
The whole of the apparatus is effectively screened

from draught.
The apparatus is cleaned before each distillation
by washing successively with acetone and water,
then inverting it, filling it with chromic sulphuric
acid mixture, after closing the open end at G, and
allowing to stand and finally rinsing with water.
Method of determination
A suitable quantity of the coarsely powdered drug
together with 75 ml of glycerin and 175 ml of
water in the one litre distilling flask and a few
116
APPENDIX - 3
3.1. TEST FOR HEAVY METALS
blank solution following the same procedure omitting

the sample.
3.1.1. Limits for Heavy Metals:
Prepare not less than 3 standard solutions of the

element being examined of different concentrations,
covering the 25 to 200 percentage of the range that
may be present in the sample solution. Add
separately the corresponding reagents as that for the
test solution and prepare the blank reference
solution with the corresponding reagents.
Table 1: Permissible Limits of Heavy Metals

S. No.
1
2
3
4
Heavy Metal contents Permissible limits

Lead
10 ppm
Arsenic
3 ppm
Cadmium
0.3 ppm
Mercury
1 ppm
3.1.2. Determination of Lead, Cadmium,

Arsenic and Mercury by Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry or by
Inductively Coupled Plasma:
Calibrate, operate the instruments as per

manufacturers recommendations and set the
analytical condition suitable for the analysis of
lead, cadmium, arsenic, and mercury.
Procedure: Prepare a test solution of the

substance being examined as follows:
Measure the absorbances of the blank reference

solution and each reference solution of different
concentrations separately, record the readings and
prepare a calibration curve with the average value of
3 readings of each concentration on the ordinate and
the corresponding concentration on the abscissa.
Transfer 3 g of the test substance to a clean, dry, 300ml Kjeldahl flask. [Note - A 800-ml flask may be used
if the reaction foams excessively]. Clamp the flask at
an angle of 450 and add a sufficient quantity of a
concentrated nitric acid to moisten the substance
thoroughly. Warm gently until the reaction
commences, allow the reaction to subside and add
portions of the same acid mixture, heating after each
addition, until a total of 18 ml of the acid has been
added. Increase the amount of heat, and boil gently
until the solution darkens. Cool, add 2 ml of nitric acid
and heat again until the solution darkens. Continue the
heating, followed by addition of nitric acid until no
further darkening occurs, then heat strongly to the
production of dense, white fumes. Cool cautiously add
5 ml of water, boil gently to the production of dense,
white fumes, and continue heating until the volume is
reduced to a few ml. Cool, cautiously add 5 ml of
water, and examine the colour of the solution. If the
colour is yellow, cautiously add 1 ml of 30 per cent
hydrogen peroxide, and again evaporate to the
production of dense, white fumes and a volume of 2 to
3 ml. If the solution is still yellow, repeat the addition
of 5 ml of water and the peroxide treatment. Cool,
dilute cautiously with a few ml of water, and rinse into
a 50-ml colour-comparison tube, taking care that the
combined volume does not exceed 25 ml. Prepare a
Interpolate the mean value of the readings obtained

with the test solution on the calibration curve to
determine the concentration of each heavy metal.
For more information on Apparatus refer API,
Part I, Volume-VI, Appendix, 2.3.7 & 2.3.8
3.2. MICROBIAL LIMIT TESTS:
Table 2: Microbial Contamination Limits
Sl.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Staphylococcus
aureus/g
Salmonella
sp./g
Pseudomonas
aeruginosa/g
Escherichia coli
Total microbial
plate count
(TPC)
Total Yeast &
Mould
Permissible
limits for
herbal
extracts and
Powders
Permissible
limits for plant
materials which
will be treated
before use
Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent
Absent
10
1 05*/g
107/g
103/g
105/g
*For topical use, the limits shall be 107/g

117
Parameters
The following tests are designed for the estimation

of the number of viable aerobic microorganisms
present and for detecting the presence of designated
microbial species in the extract. The term growth
is used to designate the presence and presumed
proliferation of viable microorganisms.
cultures described above and where the article is not

suitable for applying the membrane filtration
method it can be assumed that the failure to isolate
the inoculated organism may be due to the
bactericidal activity of the product. This may
indicate that the article is not likely to be
contaminated with the given species of
microorganisms. However, monitoring should be
continued to establish the spectrum of inhibition and
bactericidal activity of the article.
Preliminary Testing: The methods given here in

are invalid unless it is demonstrated that the test
specimens (extracts) to which they are applied do
not, of themselves, inhibit the multiplication under
the test conditions of microorganisms that can be
present. Therefore, prior to doing the tests,
inoculate diluted extracts being examined with
separate viable cultures of Escherichia coli,
Salmonella species, Pseudomonas aeruginosa and
Staphylococcus aureus. This is done by adding 1
ml of 24 hours broth culture containing not less
than 1000 microorganisms to the first dilution (in
buffer solution pH 7.2, fluid soyabean-casein
digest medium or fluid lactose medium) of the test
material and following the test procedure. If the
organisms fail to grow in the relevant medium the
procedure should be modified by (a) increasing the
volume of diluent with the quantity of test material
remaining the same, or (b) incorporating a
sufficient quantity of a suitable inactivating agent
in the diluents, or (c) combining the afore
mentioned modifications so as to permit growth of
the organisms in the media. If inhibitory
substances are present in the extracts, 0.5 per cent
of soya lecithin and 4 per cent of polysorbate 20
may be added to the culture medium.
Media
Culture media may be prepared as given below or
dehydrated culture media may be used provided that,
when reconstituted as directed by the manufacturer, they
have similar ingredients and / or yield media comparable
to those obtained from the formulae given below.
Where agar is specified in a formula, use agar that
has a moisture content of not more than 15 per cent.
Where water is called for in a formula, use purified
water. Unless otherwise indicated, the media should
be sterilized by heating in an autoclave (15 psi) at
1210 for 15 min. In preparing media by the formulas
given below, dissolve the soluble solids in the water,
using heat if necessary, to effect complete solution,
add solutions of 0.1N hydrochloric acid or 0.1N
sodium hydroxide in quantities sufficient to yield
the required pH in the medium when it is ready for
use. Determine the pH at 250 20.
Baird-Parker Agar Medium
Pancreatic digest of casein
Beef extract
Yeast extract
Lithium chloride
Agar
Glycerin
Sodium pyruvate
Water to
Alternatively, repeat the test as described in the

previous paragraph, using fluid casein digestsoya lecithin-polysorbate 20 medium, to
demonstrate neutralization of preservatives or
other antimicrobial agents in the test material.
Where inhibitory substances are contained in the
extracts and the latter is soluble, the membrane
filtration method described under total aerobic
microbial count may be used.
Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 min.

Sterilize, cool in between 450-500, add 10 ml of a
one per cent w/v solution of sterile potassium
tellurite and 50 ml of egg yolk emulsion. Mix
thoroughly, but gently and pour into plates.
(Prepare the egg-yolk emulsion by disinfecting
the surface of whole shell eggs, aseptically
If in spite of incorporation of suitable inactivating

agents and a substantial increase in the volume of
diluent it is still not possible to recover the viable
118
10.0 g
5.0 g
1.0 g
5.0 g
20.0 g
12.0 g
10.0 g
1000 ml
Buffered Sodium Chloride - Peptone Solution

pH 7.0
Potassium dihydrogen phosphate
3.56 g
Disodium hydrogen phosphate
7.23 g
Sodium chloride
4.30 g
Peptone (meat or casein)
1.0 g
Water to
1000 ml
cracking the eggs, and separating out intact yolks

into a sterile graduated cylinder.
Add sterile saline solution, get a 3 to 7 ratio of
egg-yolk to saline. Add to a sterile blender cup
and mix at high speed for 5 seconds). Adjust the
pH after sterilization to 6.8 0.2.
Bismuth Sulphite Agar Medium
Solution (1)
Beef extract
Peptone
Agar
Ferric citrate
Brilliant green
Water to
0.1 to 1.0 per cent w/v Polysorbate 20 or

polysorbate 80 may be added. Sterilize by heating
in an autoclave at 1210 for 15 min.
6.0 g
10.0 g
24.0 g
0.4 g
10.0 mg
1000 ml
Casein Soyabean Digest Agar Medium

15.0 g
Papaic digest of soyabean meal
5.0 g
Sodium chloride
5.0 g
Agar
15.0 g
Water to
1000 ml
Dissolve with the aid of heat and sterilize by

maintaining at 1150 for 30 min.
Solution (2)
Ammonium bismuth citrate
Sodium sulphite
Anhydrous disodium hydrogen
phosphate
Dextrose monohydrate
Water to
Adjust the pH after sterilization to 7.3 0.2.*

Cetrimide Agar Medium
Pancreatic digest of gelatin
Magnesium chloride
Potassium sulphate
Cetrimide
Agar
Glycerin
Water to
3.0 g
10.0 g
5.0 g
5.0 g
100 ml
Mix, heat to boiling, cool to room temperature,

add 1 volume of solution (2) to 10 volumes of
solution (1) previously melted and cooled to a
temperature of 550 and pour.
Heat to boiling for 1 min with shaking. Adjust the

pH so that after sterilization it is 7.0 to 7.4.*
Desoxycholate-Citrate Agar Medium
Beef extract
Peptone
Lactose
Trisodium citrate
Sodium thiosulphate
Ferric citrate
Sodium desoxycholate
Neutral red
Agar
Water to
Bismuth Sulphite Agar Medium should be stored

at 20 to 80 for 5 days before use.
Brilliant Green Agar Medium
Peptone
Yeast extract
Lactose
Sucrose
Sodium chloride
Phenol red
Brilliant green
Agar
Sodium chloride
Water to
10.0 g
3.0 g
10.0 g
10.0 g
5.0 g
80.0 g
12.5 mg
12.0 g
5.0 g
1000 ml
5.0 g
5.0 g
10.0 g
8.5 g
5.4 g
1.0 g
5.0 g
0.02 g
12.0 g
1000 ml
Mix and allow to stand for 15 min. Gently boil

with continuous stirring and continue boiling
until solution is complete. Cool to 800, mix, pour
and cool rapidly.
Mix, allow to stand for 15 min, sterilize by

maintaining at 1150 for 30 min and mix before
pouring.
Care should be taken not to overheat

Desoxycholate Citrate Agar during preparation. It
119
20.0 g
1.4 g
10.0 g
0.3 g
13.6 g
10.0 g
1000 ml
should not be remelted and the surface of the

plates should be dried before use.
cent w/v solution of methylene blue. The finished

medium may not be clear. Adjust the pH after
sterilization to 7.10.2.
Fluid Casein Digest - Soya Lecithin Polysorbate 20 Medium

Soya lecithin
Polysorbate 20
Water to
MacConkey Agar Medium

Peptone (meat and casein, equal parts)
Lactose
Sodium chloride
Bile salts
Agar
Neutral red
Crystal violet
Water to
20.0 g
5.0 g
40.0 ml
1000 ml
Dissolve the pancreatic digest of casein and soya

lecithin in water, heating in a water-bath at 480 to
500 for about 30 min to effect solution. Add
polysorbate 20, mix and dispense as desired*.
Fluid Lactose Medium
Beef extract
Lactose
Water to
Boil the mixture of solids and water for 1 min to effect

solution. Adjust the pH after sterilization to 7.1 0.2.*
3.0 g
5.0 g
5.0 g
1000 ml
MacConkey Broth Medium

Lactose
Dehydrated ox bile
Bromocresol purple
Water to
Cool as quickly as possible after sterilization.

Adjust the pH after sterilization to 6.9 0.2.
Lactose Broth Medium
Beef extract
Lactose
Water to
Mannitol-Salt Agar Medium

Peptic digest of animal tissue
Beef extract
D-Mannitol
Sodium chloride
Agar
Phenol red
Water to
Levine Eosin - Methylene Blue Agar Medium

10.0 g
Dibasic potassium phosphate
2.0 g
Agar
15.0 g
Lactose
10.0 g
Eosin Y
400 mg
Methylene blue
65.0 mg
Water to
1000 ml
5.0 g
5.0 g
1.0 g
10.0 g
75.0 g
15.0 g
25 mg
1000 ml
Mix, heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1

min to effect solution. Adjust the pH after
sterilization to 7.4 0.2*.
Dissolve the pancreatic digest of gelatin, dibasic

potassium phosphate and agar in water with warming
and allow to cool. Just prior to use, liquify the gelled
agar solution and the remaining ingredients, as
solutions, in the following amounts and mix. For
each 100 ml of the liquified agar solution use 5 ml of
a 20 per cent w/v solution of lactose, 2 ml of a 2 per
cent w/v solution of eosin Y and 2 ml of a 0.33 per
Nutrient Agar Medium: Nutrient broth gelled by

the addition of 1 to 2 per cent w/v of agar.
Nutrient Broth Medium
Beef extract
Peptone
Sodium chloride
Water to
Sterilize at 121 for 15 minutes in an autoclave
120
20.0 g
10.0 g
5.0 g
10.0 mg
1000 ml
Adjust the pH after sterilization to 7.3 0.2*
3.0 g
5.0 g
5.0 g
1000 ml
Adjust the pH after sterilization to 6.9 0.2.
17.0 g
3.0 g
10.0 g
5.0 g
1.5 g
13.5 g
30.0 mg
1.0 mg
1000 ml
10.0 g
10.0 g
5.0 mg
1000 ml
Dissolve with the aid of heat. Adjust the pH to 8.0

to 8.4 with 5M sodium hydroxide and boil for 10
min. Filter and sterilize by maintaining at 1150 for
30 min and adjust the pH to 7.3 0.1.
alternatively add 50 mg of chloramphenicol

immediately before use.
Selenite F Broth
Peptone
Lactose
Disodium hydrogen phosphate
Sodium hydrogen selenite
Water to
Pseudomonas Agar Medium for Detection of

Flourescein
10.0 g
Peptic digest of animal tissue
10.0 g
Anhydrous dibasic potassium phosphate
1.5 g
Magnesium sulphate hepta hydrate
1.5 g
Glycerin
10.0 ml
Agar
15.0 g
Water to
1000 ml
Dissolve, distribute in sterile containers and

sterilize by maintaining at 1000 for 30 min.
Fluid Selenite - Cystine Medium
Lactose
Sodium phosphate
Sodium hydrogen selenite
l-Cystine
Water to
Dissolve the solid components in water before

adding glycerin. Heat with frequent agitation and
boil for 1 min to effect solution. Adjust the pH
after sterilization to 7.2 0.2.
Tetrathionate Broth Medium

Beef extract
Peptone
Yeast extract
Sodium chloride
Calcium carbonate
Sodium thiosulphate
Water to
Dissolve the solid components in water before

adding glycerin. Heat with frequent agitation and
boil for 1 min to effect solution. Adjust the pH
after sterilization to 7.2 0.2*.
40.0 g
10.0 g
Tetrathionate-Bile-Brilliant
Medium
Peptone
Dehydrated ox bile
Sodium chloride
Calcium carbonate
Potassium tetrathionate
Brilliant green
Water to
15.0 g
1000 ml
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar Medium with

Antibiotics: To 1 liter of Sabouraud Dextrose
Agar Medium, add 0.1 g of benzylpenicillin
sodium and 0.1 g of tetracycline HCL or
Green
Broth
8.6 g
8.0 g
6.4 g
20.0 g
20.0 g
70.0 mg
1000 ml
Heat just to boiling; do not reheat. Adjust the pH

so that after heating it is 7.0 0.2.
121
0.9 g
4.5 g
1.8 g
4.5 g
25.0 g
40.7 g
1000 ml
Dissolve the solids in water and heat the solution to

boil. On the day of use, add a solution prepared by
dissolving 5 g of potassium iodide and 6 g of iodine
in 20 ml of water.
Mix, and boil to effect solution. Adjust the pH

after sterilization to 5.6 0.2*.
5.0 g
4.0 g
10.0 g
4.0 g
10.0 mg
1000 ml
Mix and heat in flowing steam for 15 min. Adjust

the final pH to 7.0 0.2. Do not sterilize.
Pseudomonas Agar Medium for Detection of

Pyocyanin
20.0 g
Anhydrous magnesium chloride
1.4 g
Anhydrous potassium sulphate
10.0 g
Agar
15.0 g
Glycerin
10.0 ml
Water to
1000 ml
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar Medium

Dextrose
Peptic digest of animal tissue and
pancreatic digest of casein (1:1)
Agar
Water to
5.0 g
4.0 g
10.0 g
4.0 g
1000 ml
Triple Sugar - Iron Agar Medium

Beef extract
Yeast extract
Peptone
Lactose
Sucrose
Dextrose monohydrate
Ferrous sulphate
Sodium chloride
Sodium thiosulphate
Phenol red
Water to
Xylose -Lysine-Desoxycholate Agar Medium

Xylose
3.5 g
l-Lysine
5.0 g
Lactose
7.5 g
Sucrose
7.5 g
Sodium chloride
5.0 g
Yeast extract
3.0 g
Phenol red
80.0 mg
Agar
13.5 g
Sodium desoxycholate
2.5 g
Sodium thiosulphate
6.8 g
Ferric ammonium citrate
800 mg
Water to
1000 ml
3.0 g
3.0 g
20.0 g
10.0 g
10.0 g
1.0 g
0.2 g
5.0 g
0.3 g
24.0 mg
1000 ml
Mix, allow standing for 15 min, bringing to boil

and maintain at boiling point until solution is
complete, mix, distributing in tubes and
sterilising by maintaining at 1210 for 15 min.
Allow to stand in a sloped form with a butt about
2.5 cm long.
Urea Broth Medium
Potassium dihydrogen orthophosphate
Anhydrous disodium hydrogen phosphate
Urea
Yeast extract
Phenol red
Water to
Heat the mixture of solids and water, with swirling,

just to the boiling point. Do not overheat or
sterilize. Transfer at once to a water-bath
maintained at about 500 and pour into plates as
soon as the medium has cooled. Adjust the final
pH to 7.4 0.2.
9.1 g
9.5 g
20.0 g
0.1 g
10.0 mg
1000 ml
Sampling: Use 10 ml or 10 g specimens for each

of the tests specified in the individual monograph.
Precautions: The microbial limit tests should be
carried out under conditions designed to avoid
accidental contamination during the test. The
precautions taken to avoid contamination must be
such that they do not adversely affect any
microorganisms that should be revealed in the test.
Mix, sterilize by filtration and distribute

aseptically in sterile containers.
Vogel-Johnson Agar Medium
Yeast extract
Mannitol
Dibasic potassium phosphate
Lithium chloride
Glycerin
Agar
Phenol red
Water to
3.2.1. Total Aerobic Microbial Count:
10.0 g
5.0 g
10.0 g
5.0 g
5.0 g
10.0 g
16.0 g
25.0 mg
1000 ml
Pre-treat the extracts and raw materials being

examined as described below.
Note: The raw materials needs to be ground as a
coarse powder before analysis.
Water-soluble products: Dissolve 10 g or dilute
10 ml of the extract preparation being examined,
unless otherwise specified, in buffered sodium
chloride-peptone solution pH 7.0 or any other
suitable medium shown to have no antimicrobial
activity under the conditions of test and adjust the
volume to 100 ml with the* same medium. If
necessary, adjust the pH to about 7.
Boil the solution of solids for 1 min. Sterilize, cool

to between 450-500 and add 20 ml of 1 per cent w/v
sterile solution of potassium tellurite. Adjust the
pH after sterilization to 7.0 0.2.
122
Products insoluble in water (non-fatty):

Suspend 10 g or 10 ml of the extract preparation
being examined, unless otherwise specified, in
buffered sodium chloride-peptone solution pH
7.0 or any other suitable medium shown not to
have antimicrobial activity under the conditions
of the test and dilute to 100 ml with the same
medium. If necessary, divide the preparation
being examined and homogenize the suspension
mechanically. A suitable surface-active agent
such as 0.1 per cent w/v of polysorbate 80 may be
added to assist the suspension of poorly wettable
substances. If necessary, adjust the pH of the
suspension to about 7.
buffered sodium chloride-peptone solution pH 7.0.

For fatty substances add to the liquid polysorbate
20 or polysorbate 80. Transfer one of the
membrane filters, intended for the enumeration of
bacteria, to the surface of a plate of casein
soyabean digest agar and the other, intended for the
enumeration of fungi, to the surface of a plate of
Sabouraud dextrose agar with antibiotics.
Incubate the plates for 5 days, unless a more reliable
count is obtained in shorter time, at 300 to 350 in the
test for bacteria and 200 to 250 in the test for fungi.
Count the number of colonies that are formed.
Calculate the number of microorganisms per g or
per ml of the extract preparation being examined, if
necessary count bacteria and fungi separately.
Fatty products: Homogenise 10 g or 10 ml of the

extract preparation being examined, unless
otherwise specified, with 5 g of polysorbate 20 or
polysorbate 80. If necessary, heat to not more than
400. Mix carefully while maintaining the
temperature in the water-bath or in an oven. Add
85 ml of buffered sodium chloride-peptone
solution pH 7.0 or any other suitable medium
shown to have no antimicrobial activity under the
conditions of the test, heated to not more than 400
if necessary. Maintain this temperature for the
shortest time necessary for formation of an
emulsion and in any case for not more than 30 min.
If necessary, adjust the pH to about 7.
Plate count for bacteria: Using petri dishes 9 to

10 cm in diameter, add to each dish a mixture of 1
ml of the pretreated extract preparation and about 15
ml of liquified casein soyabean digest agar at not
more than 450. Alternatively, spread the pretreated
extract preparation on the surface of the solidified
medium in a Petri dish of the same diameter. If
necessary, dilute the pretreated extract preparation
as described above so that a colony count of not
more than 300 may be expected. Prepare at least two
such Petri dishes using the same dilution and
incubate at 300 to 350 for 5 days, unless a more
reliable count is obtained in a shorter time.
Examination of the sample: Determine the total

aerobic microbial count in the extract being
examined by any of the following methods.
Count the number of colonies that are formed.

Calculate the results using plates with the greatest
number of colonies but taking 300 colonies per plate
as the maximum consistent with good evaluation.
Membrane filtration: Use membrane filters 50

mm in diameter and having a nominal pore size not
greater than 0.45 m the effectiveness of which in
retaining bacteria has been established for the type
of preparation being examined. Transfer 10 ml or
a quantity of each dilution containing 1 g of the
preparation being examined to each of two
membrane filters and filter immediately. If
necessary, dilute the pretreated extract preparation
so that a colony count of 10 to 100 may be
expected. Wash each membrane by filtering
through it three or more successive quantities, each
of about 100 ml, of a suitable liquid such as
Plate count for fungi: Proceed as described in the

test for bacteria but use Sabouraud dextrose agar
with antibiotics in place of casein soyabean digest
agar and incubate the plates at 200 to 250 for 5
days, unless a more reliable count is obtained in a
shorter time. Calculate the results using plates
with not more than 100 colonies.
Multiple-tube or serial dilution method: In each
of fourteen test tubes of similar size place 9.0 ml of
sterile fluid soyabean casein digest medium.
Arrange twelve of the tubes in four sets of three
123
3.2.2. Tests for Specified Microorganisms:
tubes each. Put aside one set of three tubes to serve

as controls. Into each of three tubes of one set
(100) and into fourth tube (A) pipette 1 ml of the
solution of suspension of the test specimen (extract)
and mix. From tube A pipette 1 ml of its contents
into the one remaining tube (B) not included in the
set and mix. These two tubes contain 100 mg (or
100 l) and 10 mg (or 10 l) of the specimen
respectively. Into each of the second set (10) of
three tubes pipette 1 ml from tube A, and into each
tube of the third set (1) pipette 1 ml from tube B.
Discard the unused contents of tube A and B. Close
well and incubate all of the tubes. Following the
incubation period, examine the tubes for growth.
The three control tubes remain clear. Observations
in the tubes containing the test specimen, when
interpreted by reference to Table 3, indicate the
most probable number of microorganisms per g or
per ml of the test specimen.
Pretreatment of the extract sample being

examined: Proceed as described under the test
for total aerobic microbial count but using
lactose broth or any other suitable medium
shown to have no antimicrobial activity under the
conditions of test in place of buffered sodium
chloride-peptone solution pH 7.0.
Escherichia coli: Place the prescribed quantity in a
sterile screw-capped container, add 50 ml of
nutrient broth, shake, allow to stand for 1 hour (4
hours for gelatin) and shake again. Loosen the cap
and incubate at 370 for 18-24 hours.
Primary test: Add 1.0 ml of the enrichment
culture to a tube containing 5 ml of MacConkey
broth. Incubate in a water-bath at 36-380 for 48
hours. If the contents of the tube show acid and
gas, carry out the secondary test.
Table 3: Most Probable Total Count by

Multiple-Tube Or Serial Dilution Method
Observed combination of
numbers of tubes
showing growth in each set
Number of mg (or ml) of
specimen per tube
10
1
100
(100 l) (10 l) (1 l)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
1
3
3
0
3
2
3
3
2
2
3
2
1
3
2
0
3
1
3
3
1
2
3
1
1
3
1
0
3
0
2
3
0
1
3
0
0
Secondary test: Add 0.1 ml of the contents of the

tubes containing (a) 5 ml of MacConkey broth and
(b) 5 ml of peptone water. Incubate in a water-bath at
43.5 - 44.50 for 24 hours and examine tube (a) for
acid and gas and tube (b) for indole. To test for
indole, add 0.5 ml of Kovacs reagent, shake well and
allow to stand for 1 min; if a red colour is produced
in the reagent layer indole is present. The presence of
acid and gas and of indole in the secondary test
indicates the presence of Escherichia coli.
Most probable
number of
microorganisms
per g or per ml
>1100
1100
500
200
290
210
150
90
160
120
70
40
95
60
40
23
Carry out a control test by repeating the primary

and secondary tests, adding 1.0 ml of the
enrichment culture and a volume of broth
containing 10 to 50 Escherichia coli (NCTC 9002)
organisms, prepared from a 24-hour culture in
nutrient broth, to 5 ml of MacConkey broth. The
test is not valid unless the results indicate that the
control contains Escherichia coli.
Alternative test: By means of an inoculating
loop, streak a portion from the enrichment culture
(obtained in the previous test) on the surface of
MacConkey agar medium. Cover and invert the
dishes and incubate. Upon examination, if none
of the colonies are brick-red in colour and have a
124
surrounding zone of precipitated bile the sample

meets the requirements of the test for the absence
of Escherichia coli.
the colonies conforms to the description given in

Table 4, the sample meets the requirements of the
test for the absence of the genus Salmonella. If any
colonies conforming to the description in Table 4
are produced, carry out the secondary test.
If the colonies described above are found, transfer

the suspect colonies individually to the surface of
Levine eosin - methylene blue agar medium, plated
on Petri dishes. Cover and invert the plates and
incubate. Upon examination, if none of the colonies
exhibits both a characteristic metallic sheen under
reflected light and a blue-black appearance under
transmitted light, the sample meets the requirements
of the test for the absence of Escherichia coli. The
presence of Escherichia coli may be confirmed by
further suitable cultural and biochemical tests.
Secondary test: Subculture any colonies showing

the characteristics given in Table 4 in triple sugariron agar by first inoculating the surface of the slope
and then making a stab culture with the same
inoculating needle, and at the same time inoculate a
tube of urea broth. Incubate at 360 to 380 for 18 to 24
hours. The formation of acid and gas in the stab
culture (with or without concomitant blackening) and
the absence of acidity from the surface growth in the
triple sugar iron agar, together with the absence of a
red colour in urea broth indicates the presence of
Salmonella. If acid but no gas is produced in the
cultures, the identity of the organisms should be
confirmed by agglutination tests.
Salmonela: Transfer a quantity of the pretreated

extract preparation being examined containing 1 g
or 1 ml of the product to 100 ml of nutrient broth in
a sterile screw-capped jar, shake, allow to stand for
4 hours and shake again. Loosen the cap and
incubate at 35-370 for 24 hours.
Carry out the control test by repeating the primary

and secondary tests using 1.0 ml of the enrichment
culture and a volume of broth containing 10 to 50
Salmonella abony (NCTC 6017) organisms,
prepared from a 24-hour culture in nutrient broth,
for the inoculation of the tubes (a) and (b). The test
is not valid unless the results indicate that the
control contains Salmonella.
Table 4: Test for Salmonella

Medium
Bismuth sulphite
agar
Brilliant green
agar
Deoxycholatecitrate agar
Xylose-lysinedesoxycholate
agar
Description of colony
Black or green
Small,
transparent
and
colourless, or opaque, pinkish
or
white
(frequently
surrounded by a pink or red
zone)
Colourless and opaque, with or
without black centers
Red with or without black
centres
Pseudomonas aeruginosa: Pretreat the extract

preparation being examined as described above
and inoculate 100 ml of fluid soyabean-casein
digest medium with a quantity of the solution,
suspension or emulsion thus obtained containing
1 g or 1 ml of the preparation being examined.
Mix and incubate at 350 to 370 for 24 to 48 hours.
Examine the medium for growth and if growth is
present, streak a portion of the medium on the
surface of cetrimide agar medium, each plated on
Petri dishes. Cover and incubate at 350 to 370 for
18 to 24 hours. If, upon examination, none of the
plates contains colonies having the characteristics
listed in Table 5 for the media used, the sample
meets the requirement for freedom from
Pseudomonas aeruginosa. If any colonies
Primary test: Add 1.0 ml of the enrichment

culture to each of the two tubes containing (a) 10
ml of selenite F broth and (b) tetrathionate-bilebrilliant green broth and incubate at 36-380 for 48
hours. From each of these two cultures subculture
on at least two of the following four agar media:
bismuth sulphate agar, brilliant green agar,
deoxycholate citrate agar and xylose-lysine
deoxycholate agar. Incubate the plates at 36-380
for 18 to 24 hours. Upon examination, if none of
125
conforming to the description in Table 5 are

produced, carry out the oxidase and pigment tests.
the media listed in Table 6 to individual tubes,

each containing 0.5 ml of mammalian, preferably
rabbit or horse, plasma with or without additives.
Streak representative suspect colonies from the

agar surface of cetrimide agar on the surfaces of
Pseudomonas agar medium for detection of
fluorescein and Pseudomonas agar medium for
detection of pyocyanin contained in Petri dishes.
Cover and invert the inoculated media and
incubate at 330 to 370 for not less than 3 days.
Examine the streaked surfaces under ultra-violet
light. Examine the plates to determine whether
colonies conforming to the description in Table 5
are present. If growth of suspect colonies occurs,
place 2 or 3 drops of a freshly prepared 1 per cent
w/v solution of N,N,N,N-tetramethyl-4phenylenediamine dihydrochloride on filter paper
and smear with the colony; if there is no
development of a pink colour, changing to purple,
the sample meets the requirements of the test for
the absence of Pseudomonas aeruginosa.
Incubate in water-bath at 370 examining the tubes

at 3 hours and subsequently at suitable intervals
up to 24 hours. If no coagulation in any degree is
observed, the sample meets the requirements of
the test for the absence of Staphylococcus aureus.
Table 6: Tests for Staphylococcus aureus
Selective
medium
VogelJohnson
agar
Mannitolsalt agar
BairdParker
agar
Table 5: Tests for Pseudomonas aeruginosa

Medium
Cetrimide
agar
Pseudomonas agar
medium for
detection
of
fluorescein
Pseudomonas agar
medium for
detection
of pyocyanin
Characteristic
colonial
morphology
Generally
greenish
Fluoresce
nce
in UV
light
Greenish
Yellowish
Generally
colourless to
yellowish
Generally
greenish
Blue
Oxid
ase
test
Gram
stain
Posit
-ive
Posit
-ive
Negative rods
Negative rods
Posit
-ive
Gram stain
Positive
cocci
(in clusters)
Positive
cocci
(in clusters)
Positive
cocci
(in clusters)
Validity of the tests for total aerobic microbial

count:
Negative rods
Grow the following test strains separately in tubes

containing fluid soyabean-casein digest medium
at 300 to 350 for 18 to 24 hours or, for Candida
albicans, at 200 for 48 hours.
Staphylococcus
aureus
Bacillus subtilis
Escherichia coli
Candida albicans
(ATCC 6538; NCTC 10788)

(ATCC 6633; NCIB 8054)
(ATCC 8739; NCIB 8545)
(ATCC 2091; ATCC 10231)
Dilute portions of each of the cultures using

buffered sodium chloride-peptone solution pH
7.0 to make test suspensions containing about 100
viable microorganisms per ml. Use the
suspension of each of the microorganisms
separately as a control of the counting methods,
in the presence and absence of the preparation
being examined, if necessary.
Staphylococcus aureus: Proceed as described

under Pseudomonas aeruginosa, if upon
examination of the incubated plates, none of
them contains colonies having the characteristics
listed in Table 6 for the media used, the sample
meets the requirements for the absence of
Staphylococcus aureus. If growth occurs, carry
out the coagulase test. Transfer representative
suspect colonies from the agar surface of any of
A count for any of the test organisms differing

by not more than a factor of 10 from the
126
Characteristic
colonial
morphology
Black
surrounded by
yellow zones
Yellow colonies
with yellow
zones
Black, shiny,
surrounded by
clear zones
of 2 to 5 mm
calculated value for the inoculum should be

obtained. To test the sterility of the medium and
of the diluent and the aseptic performance of the
test, carry out the total aerobic microbial count
method using sterile buffered sodium chloridepeptone solution pH 7.0 as the test preparation.
There should be no growth of microorganisms.
Cypermethrin (and isomers)

DDT (sum of p,p-DDT, o,p-DDT, p,pDDE and p,p-TDE)
Deltamethrin
Diazinon
Dichlorvos
Dithiocarbamates (as CS2)
Endosulfan (sum of isomers and
endosulfan sulphate)
Endrin
Ethion
Fenitrothion
Fenvalerate
Fonofos
Heptachlor (sum of heptachlor and
heptachlor epoxide)
Hexachlorobenzene
Hexachlorocyclohexane isomers (other
than )
Lindane (-hexachlorocyclohexane)
Malathion
Methidathion
Parathion
Parathion-methyl
Permethrin
Phosalone
Piperonyl butoxide
Pirimiphos-methyl
Pyrethrins (sum of)
Quintozene (sum of quintozene,
pentachloroaniline and methyl
pentachlorophenyl sulphide)
Validity of the tests for specified

microorganisms: Grow separately the test strains
of Staphylococcus aureus and Pseudomonas
aeruginosa in fluid soyabean-casein digest medium
and Escherichia coli and Salmonella typhimurium
at 300 to 350 for 18 to 24 hours. Dilute portions of
each of the cultures using buffered sodium
chloride-peptone solution pH 7.0 to make test
suspensions containing about 103 viable
microorganisms per ml. Mix equal volume of each
suspension and use 0.4 ml (approximately 102
micro-organisms of each strain) as an inoculum in
the test for E. coli, S. typhimurium, P. aeruginosa
and S. aureus, in the presence and absence of the
extract preparation being examined, if necessary. A
positive result for the respective strain of
microorganism should be obtained.
3.3. PESTICIDE RESIDUE:
Definition: For the purposes of the
Pharmacopoeia, a pesticide is any substance or
mixture of substances intended for preventing,
destroying or controlling any pest, unwanted
species of plants or animals causing harm during
or otherwise interfering with the production,
processing, storage, transport or marketing of
vegetable drugs.
0.05
2.0
0.5
1.5
0.05
0.05
0.1
0.3
0.6
1.0
0.2
0.5
0.2
1.0
0.1
3.0
4.0
3.0
1.0
ADIM
MDD100
ADI= Acceptable daily intake as published by FAOWHO, in milligrams per kilogram of body mass,
M= body mass in kilograms (60 kg),
Limit (mg/kg)
0.02
0.05
1.0
3.0
0.05
MDD= daily dose of the drug, in kilograms

If the drug is intended for the preparation of
extracts, tinctures or other pharmaceutical forms
whose preparation method modifies the content of
pesticides in the finished product, the limits are
calculated using the following expression:
0.5
0.2
0.1
127
0.5
0.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
Note: Apart from the above, if any pesticides

applied to the herb before or after harvesting
should also be tested. The limit should be
calculated using the following formula.
Table 7: Permissible Limits for Pesticide

Residue:
Substance
Alachlor
Aldrin and Dieldrin (sum of)
Azinphos-methyl
Bromopropylate
Chlordane (sum of cis-, trans - and
Oxythlordane)
Chlorfenvinphos
Chlorpyrifos
Chlorpyrifos-methyl
1.0
1.0
ADIME
MDD100
for 3 min. Filter and wash the filter cake with two
quantities, each of 25 ml of acetone. Combine the
filtrate and the washings and heat using a rotary
evaporator at a temperature not exceeding 400 until
the solvent has almost completely evaporated. To
the residue add a few milliliters of toluene and heat
again until the acetone is completely removed.
Dissolve the residue in 8 ml of toluene. Filter
through a membrane filter (45 m), rinse the flask
and the filter with toluene and dilute to 10.0 ml
with the same solvent (solution A).
E= Extraction factor for of the method of

preparation, determined experimentally.
Higher limits can also be authorised, in
exceptional cases, especially when a plant
requires a particular cultivation method or has a
metabolism or a structure that gives rise to a
higher than normal content of pesticides.
Reagents: All reagents and solvents are free from
any contaminants, especially pesticides, that
might interfere with the analysis. It is often
necessary to use special quality solvents or, if this
is not possible, solvents that have recently been redistilled in an apparatus made entirely of glass. In
any case, suitable blank tests must be carried out.
Purification: Examine by size-exclusion

chromatography. The chromatographic procedure
may be carried out using:
Apparatus: Clean the apparatus and especially

glassware to ensure that they are free from
pesticides, for example, soak for at least 16 hours
in a solution of phosphate-free detergent, rinse
with large quantities of distilled water and wash
with acetone and hexane or heptane.
a stainless steel column 0.30 m long and 7.8

mm in internal diameter packed with styrenedivinylbenzene copolymer (5 m).
as mobile phase toluene at a flow rate of

1 ml/min.
Performance of the column: Inject 100 l of a

solution containing 0.5 g/l of methyl red and 0.5
g/l of oracet blue in toluene and proceed with the
chromatography. The column is not suitable unless
the colour of the eluate changes from orange to
blue at an elution volume of about 10.3 ml. If
necessary calibrate the column, using a solution
containing toluene, at a suitable concentration, the
insecticide to be analysed with the lowest
molecular mass (for example, dichlorvos) and that
with the highest molecular mass (for example,
deltamethrin). Determine which fraction of the
eluate contains both insecticides.
3.3.1. Test for Pesticides:

The following methods may be used depending
on the substance being examined, it may be
necessary to modify, sometimes extensively, the
procedure described hereafter. In any case, it may
be necessary to use, in addition, another column
with a different polarity or another detection
method (mass spectrometry) or a different
method (immunochemical methods) to confirm
the results obtained. This procedure is valid only
for the analysis of samples of vegetable drugs
containing less than 15 per cent of water. Samples
with a higher content of water may be dried,
provided it has been shown that the drying
procedure does not affect significantly the
pesticide content.
Purification of the test solution: Inject a

suitable volume of solution A (100 l to 500 l)
and proceed with the chromatography. Collect the
fraction as determined above (solution B).
Organophosphorus insecticides are usually eluted
between 8.8 ml and 10.9 ml. Organochlorine and
pyrethroid insecticides are usually eluted between
8.5 ml and 10.3 ml.
Extraction (Method-I): To 10 g of the substance

being examined, add 100 ml of acetone and allow
to stand for 20 min. Add 1 ml of a solution
containing 1.8 g/ml of carbophenothion in
toluene. Homogenise using a high-speed blender
In a chromatography column, 0.10 m long and 5

mm in internal diameter, introduce a piece of
128
defatted cotton and 0.5 g of silica gel treated as

follows: heat silica gel for chromatography in an
oven at 1500 for at least 4 hours. Allow to cool
and add dropwise a quantity of water
corresponding to 1.5 per cent of the mass of silica
gel used; shake vigorously until agglomerates
have disappeared and continue shaking for 2
hours using a mechanical shaker. Condition the
column using 1.5 ml of hexane. Prepacked
columns containing about 0.50 g of a suitable
silica gel may also be used, provided they are
previously validated.
evaporate and dry using rotary evaporator.

Dissolve in 0.2 ml of n-hexane containing 10
ng/ml of carbophenothion and sonicate.
3.3.2. Quantitative Analysis: Refer API, Part I,
Volume VI, Section 2.5.1. page 282 to 286
3.4. TEST FOR AFLATOXINS:
Table 8: Permissible Limit of Aflatoxins
Aflatoxin
B1
B1+B2+G1+G2
Caution: Aflatoxins are highly dangerous and

extreme care should be exercised in handling
aflatoxin materials. This test is provided to detect
the possible presence of aflatoxins B 1, B2, G1
and G2 in any material of plant origin. Unless
otherwise specified in the individual monograph
use the following method.
Concentrate solution B in a current of helium for

chromatography or oxygen-free nitrogen almost
to dryness and dilute to a suitable volume with
toluene (200 l to 1 ml according to the volume
injected in the preparation of solution B).
Transfer quantitatively onto the column and
proceed with the chromatography using 1.8 ml of
toluene as the mobile phase. Collect the eluate
(solution C).
Zinc Acetate - Aluminum Chloride Reagent:

Dissolve 20 g of zinc acetate and 5 g of aluminum
chloride in sufficient water to make 100 ml.
Extraction (Method-II): To 25 g of the

substance being examined, add 300 ml of
acetonitrile : water (3 : 1) and homogenise using
a high-speed blender for 5 min. Filter and wash
the filter cake with two quantities, each of 25 ml
of acetonitrile water mixture. Transfer filtrate and
rinse to a separating funnel.
Sodium Chloride Solution: Dissolve 5 g of

sodium chloride in 50 ml of purified water.
Test Solution 1: Transfer about 5 g of the
powdered material, accurately weighed, to a
glass-stoppered flask. Add 200 ml of a mixture of
methanol and water (17 : 3). Shake vigorously by
mechanical means for not less than 30 min and
filter. [Note - If the solution has interfering plant
pigments, proceed as directed for Test Solution
2]. Discard the first 50 ml of the filtrate and
collect the next 40 ml portion. Transfer the filtrate
to a separating funnel. Add 40 ml of sodium
chloride solution and 25 ml of hexane and shake
for 1 min. Allow the layers to separate and
transfer the lower aqueous layer to a second
separating funnel. Extract the aqueous layer in the
separating funnel twice, each time with 25 ml of
methylene chloride, by shaking for 1 min. Allow
the layers to separate each time, separate the
lower organic layer and remove the solvent from
the combined and evaporate layers on a water
bath. Cool the residue. If interferences exist in the
Add 50 ml of saturated sodium chloride and mix

vigorously for 30 seconds. Add 50 ml hexane to
the separating funnel and extract. Repeat
extraction with hexane for another two times.
Collect the hexane layer and pass the combined
hexane layer through sodium sulphate. Collect the
hexane and evaporate to dryness. Dissolve the
residue in 25 ml hexane.
Florisil column clean up: Use florisil solid phase
extraction cartridges. Using bulb pipet transfer 2
ml of the hexane solution containing the pesticide
residue in to the florisil cartridge. Elute with 12
ml of 15 per cent diethyl ether in hexane. Further
elute with 12 ml of 50 per cent diethyl ether in
hexane. Collect the elutes separately and
129
Permissible Limit
< 2 ppb
< 5 ppb
residue, proceed as directed for Cleanup

Procedure; otherwise, dissolve the residue
obtained above in 0.2 ml of a mixture of
chloroform and acetonitrile (9.8 : 0.2) and shake
by mechanical means, if necessary.
each for aflatoxins B1 and G1, 0.2 g/ml each for

aflatoxins B2 and G2.
Procedure: Separately apply 2.5, 5, 7.5 and 10 l
of the Aflatoxin Solution and three 10 l
applications of either Test Solution 1 or Test
Solution 2 to a suitable thin-layer chromatographic
plate coated with a 0.25 mm layer of
chromatographic silica gel. Superimpose 5 l of
the Aflatoxin Solution on one of the three 10 l
applications of the Test Solution. Allow the spots
to dry and develop the chromatogram in an
unsaturated chamber containing a solvent system
consisting of a mixture of chloroform, acetone and
isopropyl alcohol (85 :10 : 5) until the solvent front
has moved not less than 8 cm from the origin.
Remove the plate from the developing chamber,
mark the solvent front and allow the plate to airdry. Locate the spots on the plate by examination
under UV light at 366 nm: the four applications of
the Aflatoxin Solution appear as four clearly
separated blue fluorescent spots; the spot obtained
from the Test Solution that was superimposed on
the Aflatoxin Solution is no more intense than that
of the corresponding Aflatoxin Solution; and no
spot from any of the other Test Solutions
corresponds to any of the spots obtained from the
applications of the Aflatoxin Solution. If any spot
of aflatoxins is obtained in the Test Solution, the
colour match the position of each fluorescent spot
of the Test Solution with those of the Aflatoxin
Solution to identify the type of aflatoxin present.
The intensity of the aflatoxins spot, if present in the
Test Solution, when compared with that of the
corresponding aflatoxin in the Aflatoxin Solution
will give an approximate concentration of
aflatoxin in the Test Solution.
Test Solution 2: Collect 100 ml of the filtrate

from the start of the flow and transfer to a 250 ml
beaker. Add 20 ml of zinc acetate-aluminum
chloride reagent and 80 ml of water. Stir and
allow to stand for 5 min. Add 5 g of a suitable
filtering aid, such as diatomaceous earth, mix and
filter. Discard the first 50 ml of the filtrate, and
collect the next 80 ml portion. Proceed as directed
for Test Solution 1, beginning with Transfer the
filtrate to a separating funnel.
Cleanup Procedure: Place a medium-porosity
sintered-glass disk or a glass wool plug at the
bottom of a 10 mm x 300 mm chromatographic
tube. Prepare slurry of 2 g of silica gel with a
mixture of diethyl ether and hexane (3 : 1), pour the
slurry into the column and wash with 5 ml of the
same solvent mixture. Allow the absorbent to settle
and add to the top of the column a layer of 1.5 g of
anhydrous sodium sulphate. Dissolve the residue
obtained above in 3 ml of methylene chloride and
transfer it to the column. Rinse the flask twice with
1 ml portions of methylene chloride, transfer the
rinses to the column and elute at a rate not greater
than 1 ml per min. Add successively to the column
3 ml of hexane, 3 ml of diethyl ether and 3 ml of
methylene chloride; elute at a rate not greater than 3
ml per min; and discard the eluates. Add to the
column 6 ml of a mixture of methylene chloride and
acetone (9 : 1) and elute at a rate not greater than 1
ml per min, preferably without the aid of vacuum.
Collect this eluate in a small vial, add a boiling chip
if necessary and evaporate to dryness on a water
bath. Dissolve the residue in 2 ml of a mixture of
chloroform and acetonitrile (9.8 : 0.2) and shake by
mechanical means if necessary.
3.5. THIN-LAYER CHROMATOGRAPHY

(TLC):
Thin-layer chromatography is a technique in
which a solute undergoes distribution between
two phases, stationary phase and a mobile phase.
The stationary phase acts as an adsorbent in a
relatively thin, uniform layer of dry finely
powdered material applied to a glass, plastic or
Aflatoxin Solution: Dissolve accurately weighed

quantities of aflatoxins B1, B2, G1 and G2 in a
mixture of chloroform and acetonitrile (9.8 : 0.2) to
obtain a solution having concentration of 1.0 g/ml
130
metal sheet. Precoated plates are most commonly

used. Separation may also be achieved on the
basis of partition or a combination of partition and
adsorption, depending on the particular type of
stationary phase, its preparation and its use with
different solvents.
and sealed. The chamber is fitted with a plate

support rack that supports the plates, back to
back, with lid of the chamber in place.
(g) Graduated micro-pipettes capable of delivering
microlitre quantities say 10 l and less.
(h) A reagent sprayer that will emit a fine spray
and will not itself be attacked by the reagent.
Identification can be effected by comparison of

spots of identical Rf value and colour in unknown
sample to a reference sample chromatographed
on the same plate. A visual comparison of the size
and intensity of the spots usually serves for semiquantitative estimation.
(i) An ultra-violet light, suitable for observation

at short (254 nm) and long (366 nm) ultraviolet wavelengths.
Preparation of plates: Unless otherwise
specified in the monograph, the plates are prepared
in the following manner. Prepare a suspension of
the coating substance in accordance with the
instructions of the supplier and, using the
spreading device designed for the purpose, spread
a uniform layer of the suspension, 0.20 to 0.30 mm
thick, on a flat glass plate 20 cm long. Allow the
coated plates to dry in air, heat at 1000 to 1050 for
at least 1 hour (except in the case of plates prepared
with cellulose when heating for 10 min is normally
sufficient) and allow to cool, protected from
moisture. Store the plates protected from moisture
and use within 3 days of preparation. At the time
of use, dry the plates again, if necessary, as
prescribed in the monographs. Now a days pre
coated plates of silica gel on glass/aluminium/
plastic sheets are also available.
Apparatus:
(a) Flat uniformly thick glass plates of
appropriate dimensions coated with a layer of
adsorbent that allow the application of the
necessary number of the solutions being
examined along with reference solutions. The
plates are prepared as described below;
alternatively, commercially prepared plates
may be used.
(b) An aligning tray or a flat surface on which the
plates can be aligned and rested when the
coating substance is applied.
(c) The coating substance consists of finely
divided adsorbent materials, normally
between 5 to 40 m in diameter is suitable for
chromatography. It can be applied directly to
the plate or can be bonded to the plate by
means of plaster of paris (hydrated calcium
sulphate) or with any other suitable binder.
The adsorbent may contain fluorescing
material to help in visualising spots that
absorb ultra-violet light.
Method:
Unless unsaturated conditions are prescribed,
prepare the tank by lining the walls with sheets of
filter paper; pour into the tank, saturating the filter
paper in the process, sufficient of the mobile
phase to form a layer of solvent 5 to 10 mm deep,
close the tank and allow to stand for 1 hour at
room temperature. Remove a narrow strip of the
coating substance, about 5 mm wide, from the
vertical sides of the plate. Apply the solutions
being examined in the form of circular spots
about 2 to 6 mm in diameter, or in the form of
bands (10 to 20 mm x 2 to 6 mm unless otherwise
specified) on a line parallel with, and 20 mm
from, one end of the plate, and not nearer than 20
(d) A spreader which, when moved over the glass

plate, will apply a uniform layer of adsorbent
of desired thickness over the entire surface of
the plate.
(e) A storage rack to support the plates during
drying and transportation.
(f) A developing chamber that can accommodate
one or more plates and can be properly closed
131
mm to the sides; the spots should be 15 mm apart.

If necessary, the solutions may be applied in
portions, drying between applications. Mark the
sides of the plate 15 cm, or the distance specified
in the monograph, from the starting line. Allow
the solvent to evaporate and place the plate in the
tank, ensuring that it is as nearly vertical as
possible and that the spots or bands are above the
level of the mobile phase. Close the tank and
allow to stand at room temperature, until the
mobile phase has ascended to the marked line.
Remove the plate and dry and visualize as
directed in the monograph; where a spraying
technique is prescribed it is essential that the
reagent be evenly applied as a fine spray.
plate with suitable instrumentation. Measurement

is of the reflectance of the incident light from the
spots by moving the plate or the measuring
device. Likewise, fluorescence may be measured
using an appropriate optical system.
Apparatus: The apparatus
measurement consist of:
direct
a device for exact positioning and

reproducible application of the amount of
solutions onto the plate,
a mechanical device for moving the plate or
the measuring device along the x-axis or the
y-axis, (Applicator)
a recorder and a suitable integrator or a
computer, and
For two-dimensional chromatography dry the

plate after the first development and carry out the
second development in a direction perpendicular
to the first.
a photometer with a source of light, an

optical device for generating monochromatic
light and a photocell of adequate sensitivity;
for measurement of fluorescence, a suitable
filter to prevent light used for excitation from
reaching the detector while permitting
emitted light or a specific portion thereof to
pass (Densitometer)
When the method prescribed in the monograph

specifies protected from light or in subdued
light it is intended that the entire procedure is
carried out under these conditions.
Visualization:
Method: Prepare the test solution and reference

solution as prescribed in the individual monograph.
Use the same solvent for all the solutions and apply
the same volume of each and develop the plate.
Prepare and apply new fewer than 3 reference
solutions of the substance under examination, the
concentrations of which span the expected value in
the test solution (about 80 per cent, 100 per cent and
120 per cent). Treat with the prescribed reagent, if
necessary, and record the reflectance, the
transmittance or fluorescence in the chromatograms
obtained with all the solutions. Use the measured
results to calculate the amount of substance in the
test solution.
The phrases ultra-violet light (254 nm) and ultraviolet light (366 nm) indicate that the plate
should be examined under an ultra-violet light
having a maximum output at about 254 or at about
365 nm, as the case may be. The term secondary
spot means any spot other than the principal spot.
Similarly, a secondary band is any band other
than the principal band.
Rf Value:
Measure and record the distance of each spot
from the point of its application and calculate the
Rf value by dividing the distance travelled by the
spots by the distance travelled by the front of the
mobile phase.
The requirement for resolution and separation are

prescribed in the individual monograph.
3.5.1. Quantitative measurement

The substances that have been separated after
development of the plate and that respond to UVVis irradiation can be estimated directly on the
132
for
3.6. LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY:
absorbance depends on the concentration of the

absorbing substance in the solution and the
thickness of the absorbing layer taken for
measurement.
Liquid chromatography is one of the widely used

methods for separation and quantitative estimation
of marker compounds present in herbal drugs. It is
a liquid chromatographic system that uses narrow
columns (~ 5 mm in diameter), pumping system
operating at pressures up to 200 atm and suitable
detectors. Reversed phase silica columns are widely
used. A guard column is recommended to be fitted
before the column to prevent the entry of unwanted
compounds of the sample solution into the column.
Sample introduction is done by syringe and a loop
injector may be fitted with a fixed volume loop
between 1-200l to facilitate accurate sample
injection. Detection of the compound of interest is
by retention time, UV absorbance fluorescence and
electrical conductions. For majority of analyses,
variable wavelength UV or photodiode array UV
and RI detectors are used. Details of
chromatographic conditions, e.g., column type,
mobile phases, flow rats, detectors, etc. are given in
detail in individual monographs. For accurate
analysis, high purity reagents and HPLC grade
solvents must be used.
For convenience of reference and for ease in

calculations, the specific absorbance of a 1 per
cent w/v solutions is adopted in this
Pharmacopoeia for several substances unless
otherwise indicated, and it refers to the
absorbance of a 1 per cent w/v solution in a 1 cm
cell and measured at a defined wavelength. It is
evaluated by the expression.
A (1 per cent, 1 cm) = A/cl
Where c is the concentration of the absorbing
substance expressed as percentage w/v and l is the
thickness of the absorbing layers in cm. The value of
A (1 per cent, 1 cm) at a particular wavelength in a
given solvent is a property of the absorbing substance.
Unless otherwise stated, measure the absorbance at
the prescribed wavelength using a path length of 1
cm and at 240 to 260. Unless otherwise stated, the
measurements are carried out with reference to the
same solvent or the same mixture of solvents.
Columns
Determination of absorbance: Unless otherwise

directed, measure the absorbance at the prescribed
wavelength using a path length of 1 cm at 240 and
260. If necessary, the path length may be varied
provided that compliance with Beers Law has
been shown over the range in question.
1. Silica C 18 - Octadecyl silane chemically

bonded to porous silica or ceramic particles.
2. Silica Nitrile- Nitrile groups chemically
bonded to porous silica microparticles
3.7. Spectrophotometry
A statement in assay or test of the wavelength at

which maximum absorption occurs implies that
the maximum occurs either precisely at or within
2 nm of the given wavelength.
Ultraviolet and visible absorption spectrophotometry

is the measurement of the absorption of
monochromatic radiation by solutions of chemical
substances, in the range of 185 nm to 380 nm, and
380 nm to 780 nm of the spectrum, respectively.
Likewise, a statement in a test of the absorbance, A,

at a given wavelength or at the maximum at about a
specified wavelength implies that the measured
absorbance is within 3 per cent of the stated value.
The magnitude of the absorption of a solution is

expressed in terms of the absorbance, A, defined
as the logarithm to base 10 of the reciprocal of
transmittance (T) for monochromatic radiation:
When an assay or test prescribes the use of a

reference substance, make the spectrophotometric
measurements with the solution prepared from the
reference substance by the official directions and
A=log10 (I0/I)
Where I0 is the intensity of the incident radiation.
I is the intensity of the transmitted radiation. The
133
Stationary phases
then with the corresponding solution prepared from

the substance under examination. Carry out the
second measurement as quickly as possible after the
first, using the same cell and same experimental
conditions.
Stationary phases are contained in columns which

may be:
a capillary column of fused-silica whose wall
is coated with the stationary phase,
Unless otherwise specified, the requirements in the

monographs for light absorption in the tests and
assay apply to the dried or anhydrous material,
where a standard is given for solvent content. In
calculating the result, the loss on drying or contents
of water solvent, determined by the method
specified in the monograph, are taken in to account.
a column packed with inert particles

impregnated with the stationary phase,
a column packed with solid stationary phase.
Capillary columns are 0.1 mm to 0.53 mm in
internal diameter and 5 m to 60 m in length. The
liquid or stationary phase, which may be
chemically bonded to the inner surface, is a film
0.1m to 5.0m thick.
3.8. TEST FOR RESIDUAL SOLVENT:

Residual ethanol limits: Not more than 5000 ppm
Packed columns, made of glass or metal, are

usually 1 m to 3 m in length with an internal
diameter of 2 mm to 4 mm. Stationary phases
usually consist of porous polymers or solid
supports impregnated with liquid phase.
Quantitative analysis of residual solvents:

Gas chromatography (GC) is a chromatographic
separation technique based on the difference in the
distribution of species between two non-miscible
phases in which the mobile phase is a carrier gas
moving through or passing the stationary phase
contained in a column. It is applicable to
substances or their derivatives which are
volatilised under the temperatures employed.
Supports for analysis of polar compounds on

columns packed with low-capacity, low-polarity
stationary phase must be inert to avoid peak tailing.
The reactivity of support materials can be reduced
by silanising prior to coating with liquid phase.
Acid-washed, flux-calcinated diatomaceous earth
is often used. Materials are available in various
particle sizes, the most commonly used particles
are in the ranges of 150 m to 180 m and 125
m to 150 m.
GC is based on mechanisms of adsorption, mass

distribution or size exclusion.
Apparatus: The apparatus consists of an
injector, a chromatographic column contained in
an oven, a detector and a data acquisition system
(or an integrator or a chart recorder). The carrier
gas flows through the column at a controlled rate
or pressure and then through the detector.
Mobile phases: Retention time and peak

efficiency depend on the carrier gas flow rate;
retention time is directly proportional to column
length and resolution is proportional to the square
root of the column length. For packed columns, the
carrier gas flow rate is usually expressed in
millilitres per min at atmospheric pressure and
room temperature. Flow rate is measured at the
detector outlet, either with a calibrated mechanical
device or with a bubble tube, while the column is
at operating temperature. The linear velocity of the
carrier gas through a packed column is inversely
proportional to the square root of the internal
diameter of the column for a given flow volume.
The chromatography is carried out either at a

constant temperature or according to a given
temperature programme.
Injectors: Direct injections of solutions are the
usual mode of injection, unless otherwise
prescribed in the monograph. Injection may be
carried out either directly at the head of the
column using a syringe or an injection valve, or
into a vaporisation chamber which may be
equipped with a stream splitter.
134
Flow rates of 60 ml/min in a 4 mm internal

diameter column and 15 ml/min in a 2 mm internal
diameter column, give identical linear velocities
and thus similar retention times.
reference is made to a particular commercial brand

that has been found to be suitable for the purpose,
but such statements do not imply that a different but
equivalent commercial brand may not be used.
Helium or nitrogen is usually employed as the

carrier gas for packed columns, whereas
commonly used carrier gases for capillary
columns are nitrogen, helium and hydrogen.
The chromatography is carried out either at a

constant temperature or according to a given
temperature programme.
Detectors: Flame-ionisation detectors are

usually employed but additional detectors which
may be used include: electron-capture, nitrogenphosphorus, mass spectrometric, thermal
conductivity, Fourier transform infrared
spectrophotometric, and others, depending on the
purpose of the analysis.
Test solution: Place in the round bottom flask,

accurately weigh about 1 g, of the substance being
examined, dissolve in 15 ml of
dimethylformamide. Heat the flask and collect the
exactly 10 ml of distillate in a graduated cylinder.
Cooling by circulating water is essential. Measure
and record the volume.
Method: Equilibrate the column, the injector and

the detector at the temperatures and the gas flow
rates specified in the monograph until a stable
baseline is achieved. Prepare the test solution(s)
and the reference solution(s) as prescribed. The
solutions must be free from solid particles.
Standard preparation ethanol: Prepare

500ppm of ethanol in dimethylformamide
separately.
Performance: Criteria for assessing the

suitability of the system are described in the
chapter on Chromatographic separation
techniques. The extent to which adjustments of
parameters of the chromatographic system can be
made to satisfy the criteria of system suitability
are also given in this chapter.
Column with stationary phase: A fused-silica

capillary column 30 m long and 0.25 or 0.32 or 53
mm in internal diameter coated with cross-linked 6
per cent polycyanopropylphenylsiloxane and 94
per cent polydimethylsiloxane having film
thickness: 1.4 m, 1.8 m or 3 m .
Analytical procedure:
Chromatographic condition:
Detector: Flame ionization detector
Temperature: Coloumn 340 to 1000 @ 150/min.,

then increase to 1800 @ 250/min then increase to
2250 @ 400/min. Injection port temperature 2500;
detector temperature 2750.
Reagents: Solvents and reagents used in the

preparation of solutions for examination should be
of a quality suitable for use in gas chromatography.
A wide range of chemical substances is used as
stationary phases, including polyethylene glycols,
high-molecular weight esters and amides,
hydrocarbons, silicone gums and fluids
(polysiloxanes often substituted with methyl,
phenyl, nitrilo, vinyl or fluoroalkyl groups or
mixtures of these) and microporous cross-linked
polyaromatic beads. A suitable stationary phase, its
concentration and the nature and grade of a suitable
solid support are stated in the monograph. The
column should be conditioned in accordance with
the manufacturers instructions. In most cases
Carrier Gas: Nitrogen for chromatography at an

appropriate flow
Procedure: Inject 1 l standard solution and
record the chromatogram. In the chromatogram
obtained with test solution. If there is any peak
corresponding to ethanol the peak area is not
greater than the peak area in the chromatogram
obtained with standard solution for ethanol.
135
3.9. Stability Testing and Shelf Life

Determination for New and Existing
Ayurvedic Drugs
store the samples of same batch material at

standard storage and accelerated storage
conditions and test them periodically. Based on
the evaluation of the results, the expiry date or
shelf life may be determined.
(This guideline is not limited only to ASU extracts

covered under this volume of API. It shall be
applicable to all the licensed ASU medicines)
The second approach is to select samples from

batches manufactured over a period of last five
years spanning six months and evaluate them
simultaneously. Based on the result obtained the
expiry date or shelf life may be determined. This
approach is applicable for existing products
which do not have yet a declared shelf life. This
approach has been referred in scientific literature
as the cross sectional approach.
3.9.1 Scope and Objective

The objective of this guideline is to specify the
method of arriving at shelf life by stability testing.
The shelf life determined by the process
mentioned in this guideline can be used to decide
the expiry date, in case a manufacturer wishes to
assign a shelf life longer than one specified by the
notification GSR 764(E) dated October 15, 2009.
3.9.3 Selection of batches
The guideline can be used for all patented and

proprietary Ayurvedic medicines, both new and
existing products.
Formal stability studies should be conducted on

at least three primary batches. The primary
batches should be of the same formulation as
proposed for marketing. For new products, the
batches should be manufactured to a minimum of
pilot scale by the same route as, and using a
method of manufacture and procedure that
simulates the final process to be used for
production batches. Pilot batches which are at
least 1/10 of the commercial batch size can be
used. The overall quality of the batches of drug
placed in formal stability studies should be
representative of the quality of the material made
on production scale. Where possible, batches of
drug product should be manufactured by using
different batches of drug substance. Stability to be
performed on each individual strength and
container size of the product unless bracketing
and matrixing is applied.
3.9.2 General Information on Stability

Information of shelf life (expiry date) is
mandatory requirement for all licensed Ayurvedic
medicines. The stability depends on various
factors like the nature of the product, the
ingredients of the products, the packaging
material etc. Stability studies are carried out to
demonstrate that the medicine will remain
suitable for consumption during shelf period
when stored under the condition(s) mentioned on
the packaging. On the product label, if there is no
mention about any specific storage condition,
then it is assumed that the product can be stored
at room temperature (below 30o). For a suitable
drug substance, retest period is more appropriate
than expiry date.
For cross sectional approach at least two batches

per year to be selected. For example if stability to
be evaluated for four years eight batches should
be selected.
The purpose of stability testing is to provide

evidence on how the quality of a drug substance
or drug product varies with time under the
influence of variety of environmental factors such
as temperature, humidity, and light, to establish a
retest period for drug substance or a shelf life for
drug products.
3.9.4 Container and closure system

The stability studies should be conducted on the
dosage form packaged in the container and closure
system proposed for marketing (including as
appropriate, any secondary packaging and container
Two approaches can be followed to monitor the

stability of the product. The first approach is to
136
label). If the container is too large for drug

substances the stability studies should be conducted
in a container and closure system that is the same as
or simulates the packaging proposed for storage and
distribution.
formulation
(except
for
preservative
concentration) intended for marketing.
3.9.6 Testing frequency
For long term studies frequency of testing should
be sufficient to establish the stability profile of the
drug. For drug with proposed shelf life of at least
12 months, the frequency of testing at long term
storage condition should normally be every 6
months over first year, and the second year and
annually thereafter through the proposed re-test
period or shelf life.
3.9.5 Specification
Specification is a list of tests, reference to analytical
procedures and proposed acceptance criteria.
Stability study should include testing of those
attributes of the drug that are susceptible to
change during storage and are likely to influence
quality, safety, and/or efficacy. The testing should
cover as appropriate, the physical, chemical,
biological, and microbiological attributes.
Validated
stability-indicating
analytical
procedures should be applied. Whether and to
what extent replication should be performed will
depend on the results from validation studies.
At the accelerated storage condition, a minimum

of three time points including the initial and final
time points (e.g. 0, 3 and 6 months) from a 6
month study is recommended.
Reduced designs i.e., matrixing or bracketing,
where the testing frequency is reduced or certain
factor combinations are not tested at all, can be
applied if justified.
The physical parameters included in the

specification need not be limited to colour, odour,
appearance, shape and taste only. The chemical
parameters should include colour reaction, pH
value, weight variation, disintegration, bulk
density, extractive values, estimation of active or
marker or category compound by suitable methods
and chromatographic profiling. A suitable
bioassay may be employed wherever possible.
3.9.7 Storage condition

The world can be divided in to four climatic zones
I - IV. This guideline address zone IV. The choice
of test conditions defined in this guideline is based
on an analysis of the effects of climatic conditions
in the zone. Recommended storage conditions are
Study
The limits of acceptance for the products should

be those specified in pharmacopoeia. If limits are
not available these should be derived from release
specification. Shelf life acceptance criteria should
be derived from consideration of all available
stability information. It may be appropriate to
have justifiable differences between the shelf life
and release acceptance criteria based on the
stability evaluation and the changes observed on
storage. Any differences between the release and
shelf life acceptance criteria for antimicrobial
preservative content should be supported by a
validated correlation of chemical content and
preservative effectiveness demonstrated during
development of the product in its final
Accelerated
Long term
Minimum
time
6 months
12 months
Other storage conditions are allowable if suitably

justified. For products which are temperature
sensitive, to be stored in lower temperature which
will then become the condition designated long
term storage temperature. The accelerated testing
should be then carried out at least 100 more than the
long term storage condition along with appropriate
relative humidity condition for that temperature.
The reference samples for the above study should
be stored in a temperature less than 10o.
137
Storage
condition
40o 2o/ 75 %
RH 5 %
30o 2o/ 60 %
RH 5 %
3.9.8 Evaluation
The purpose of stability is to establish, based on
testing a minimum of at least three batches of the
drug, a retest period applicable to all future batches
for the drug substance, or a shelf life and label
storage instructions applicable for all future
batches of the drug product manufactured and
packed under similar circumstances.
An Ayurvedic drug can be considered to be stable
if no significant change occurs during at any
time of testing at accelerated storage condition or
at real time storage condition.
Significant change for a drug is defined as
1. A + or - 20 per cent change from the initial
assay value (If the drug is analyzed for its
marker). A + or - 15 per cent change from the
initial assay value (If the drug is analyzed for
its active compound).
2. Appearance of new spots in Identification by
TLC (when compared with the sample stored
in less than 10o) or completely disappearance
of existing spot.
3. The physico-chemical parameters (moisture,
ash, particle size) shall not vary beyond 25 per
cent of the initial value.
4. Failure to meet the acceptance criteria as per
individual monographs or specification.
Failure to meet acceptance criteria for appearance
(Physical attributes, and functionality tests e.g.,
colour, phase separation, caking, hardness).
138
APPENDIX - 4
REAGENTS AND CHEMICALS
Acetic Acid - Contains approximately 33 per cent
w/v of C2H4O2. Dilute 315 ml of glacial acetic
acid to 1000 ml with water.
liberated iodine with 0.1 N sodium thiosulphate,

using starch solution as indicator. Not less than 1
ml of 0.1 N sodium thiosulphate is required.
Acetic Acid, Glacial - CH3COOH =60.05
Odorous impurities - Neutralise 1.5 ml with

sodium hydroxide solution; the solution has no
odour other than a faint acetous odour.
Contains not less than 99.0 per cent w/w of

C2H4O2. About 17.5 N in strength
Readily oxidisable impurities - To 5 ml of the

solution prepared for the test for formic acid
and oxidisable impurities, add 20 ml of water
and 0.5 ml of 0.1 N potassium permanganate;
the pink colour does not entirely disappear
within half a min.
Description - At temperature above its

freezing point a clear colourless liquid, odour,
pungent and characteristic; crystallises when
cooled to about 100 and does not completely
re-melt until warmed to about 150.
Solubility - Miscible with water, with
glycerin and most fixed and volatile oils.
Non-volatile matter - Leaves not more than

0.01 per cent w/w of residue when evaporated
to dryness and dried to constant weight at
1050.
Boiling range - Between 1170 and 1190

Congealing temperature - Not lower than 14.80
Assay - Weigh accurately about 1 g into a

stoppered flask containing 50 ml of water and
titrate with N sodium hydroxide, using
phenolphthalein solution as indicator. Each ml of
sodium hydroxide is equivalent to 0.06005 g of
C2H4O2.
Wt. per ml - At 250about 1.047 g

Heavy metals - Evaporate 5 ml to dryness in
a porcelain dish on water-bath, warm the
residue with 2 ml of 0.1 N hydrochloric acid
and water to make 25 ml; the limit of heavy
metals is 10 parts per million, Appendix 2.3.3.
Acetic Acid, Lead-Free - Acetic acid which

complies with following additional test, boil 25 ml
until the volume is reduced to about 15 ml, cool
make alkaline with lead-free ammonia solution,
add 1 ml of lead free potassium cyanide solution,
dilute to 50 ml with water, add 2 drops of sodium
sulphide solution; no darkening is produced.
Chloride - 5 ml complies with the limit test for

chlorides, Appendix 2.3.2.
Sulphate - 5 ml complies with the limit test
for sulphates,
Certain aldehydic substances - To 5 ml add 10 ml
of mercuric chloride solution and make alkaline
with sodium hydroxide solution, allow to stand
for five min and acidify with dilute sulphuric
acid; the solution does not show more than a faint
turbidity.
Acetone - Propan-2-one; C3H6O = 58.08 (67-64-1)
Analytical reagent grade of commerce. A

volatile, flammable liquid; boiling point, about
560; weight per ml, about 0.79 g. Complies with
the following test. Water Not more than 0.3 per
cent w/w, Appendix IX C, using anhydrous
pyridine as the solvent.
Formic acid and oxidisable impurities - Dilute 5 ml

with 10 ml of water, to 5 ml of this solution add 2.0
ml of 0.1 N potassium dichromate and 6 ml of
sulphuric acid, and allow to stand for one min, add
25 ml of water, cool to 150, and add 1 ml of freshly
prepared potassium iodide solution and titrate the
Acetonitrile - Methyl Cyanide; CH3CN = 41.05

General laboratory reagent grade of commerce
139
Colourless liquid; bp about 810; wt. per ml,

about 0.78 g
Acetonitrile intended for use
spectrophotometry complies with
following test:
Foreign organic substances - Clean a glassstoppered cylinder thoroughly with hydrochloric

acid, rinse with water and finally rinse with the
alcohol under examination. Put 20 ml in the
cylinder, cool to about 150 and then add from a
carefully cleaned pipette 0.1 ml of 0.1 N
potassium permanganate. Mix at once by
inverting the stoppered cylinder and allow to
stand at 150 for five min; the pink colour does
not entirely disappear.
in
the
Transmittance: not less than 98 per cent in the

range 255 to 420 nm using water as the blank
Alcohol Description - Clear, colourless, mobile,
volatile liquid, odour, characteristic and
spirituous; taste, burning, readily volatilised
even at low temperature, and boils at about
780, flammable. Alcohol containing not less
than 94.85 per cent v/v and not more than 95.2
per cent v/v of C2H5OH at 15.560.
Isopropyl alcohol and t-butyl alcohol - To 1 ml

add 2 ml of water and 10 ml of mercuric
sulphate solution and heat in a boiling waterbath; no precipitate is formed within three min.
Aldehydes and ketones - Heat 100 ml of
hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution in a
loosely stoppered flask on a water-bath for
thirty min, cool, and if necessary, add
sufficient 0.05 N sodium hydroxide to restore
the green colour. To 50 ml of this solution add
25 ml of the alcohol and heat on a water bath
for ten min in a loosely stoppered flask. Cool,
transfer to a Nesseler cylinder, and titrate
with 0.05 N sodium hydroxide until the
colour matches that of the remainder of the
hydroxylamine hydrochloride solution
contained in a similar cylinder, both solutions
being viewed down the axis of the cylinder.
Not more than 0.9 ml of 0.05 N sodium
hydroxide is required.
Solubility - Miscible in all proportions with

water, with chloroform and with solvent ether
Acidity or alkalinity - To 20 ml add five
drops of phenolphthalein solution; the
solution remains colourless and requires not
more than 2.0 ml of 0. 1 N sodium hydroxide
to produce a pink colour.
Specific gravity - Between 0.8084 and 0.8104
at 250
Clarity of solution - Dilute 5 ml to 100 ml with
water in glass cylinder; the solution remains
clear when examined against a black
background. Cool to 100 for thirty min; the
solution remains clear.
Fusel oil constituents - Mix 10 ml with 5 ml of

water and 1 ml of glycerin and allow the mixture
to evaporate spontaneously from clean,
odourless absorbent paper; no foreign odour is
perceptible at any stage of the evaporation.
Methanol - To one drop, add one of water,

one drop of dilute phosphoric acid, and one
drop of potassium permanganate solution.
Mix, allow to stand for one min and add
sodium bisulphite solution dropwise, until the
permanganate colour is discharged. If a
brown colour remains, add one drop of dilute
phosphoric acid. To the colourless solution
add 5 ml of freshly prepared chromotropic
acid solution and heat on a water-bath at 600
for ten min; no violet colour is produced.
Non-volatile matter - Evaporate 40 ml in a

tared dish on a water-bath and dry the residue
at 1050 for one hour; the weight of the residue
does not exceed 1 mg.
Storage - Store in tightly-closed containers,
away from fire.
Labelling - The label on the container states
Flammable.
140
Alcohol, Aldehyde-free - Alcohol which

complies with the following additional test:
proportionately lesser amounts of reagents or

by appropriate dilution.
Aldehyde - To 25 ml, contained in 300 ml flask,

add 75 ml of dinitrophenyl hydrazine solution,
heat on a water bath under a reflux condenser for
twenty four hours, remove the alcohol by
distillation, dilute to 200 ml with a 2 per cent v/v
solution of sulphuric acid, and set aside for
twenty four hours; no crystals are produced.
Butan-1-ol - n-Butyl alcohol; butanol; C4H10O =

74.12 (71-36-3).
Analytical reagent grade of commerce.
A colourless liquid; boiling point, 1160 to
1190; d20
20 , about 0.81
Butan-1-ol - n-Butyl alcohol; butanol; C4H10O =
74.12 (71-36-3)
Alcohol, Sulphate-free - Shake alcohol with

an excess of anion exchange resin for thirty
min and filter.

A colourless liquid; boiling point, 1160 to
1190; d20
20 , about 0.81
Ammonia solution Sp. - Strong ammonia solution

which complies with the following additional test.
Chloroform - Trichloromethane; CHCl3 = 119.4

(67-66-3)
Evaporate 10 ml to dryness on a water-bath. To

the residue add 1 ml of dilute hydrochloric acid
Sp. and evaporate to dryness. Dissolve the residue
in 2 ml of dilute acetic acid Sp., add sufficient
water to produce 25 ml and add 10 ml of
hydrogen sulphide solution. Any darkening
produced is not greater than that of a blank
solution containing 2 ml of dilute acetic acid Sp.,
1.0 ml of standard lead solution and sufficient
water to produce 25 ml.
Analytical reagent grade of commerce

containing 0.4 to 1.0 per cent w/w of ethanol
A colourless liquid with a sweet, penetrating
odour; boiling point, about 600; d20
20 1.475 to
1.481
Citric Acid - C6H8O7,H2O = 210.1 (5949-29-1).
Analytical reagent grade of commerce. When
used in the limit test for iron, complies with the
following requirement:
0.1 M ammonia - Solution of any molarity x M

may be prepared by diluting 75 x ml of strong
ammonia solution to 1000 ml with water
Dissolve 0.5 g in 10 ml of water, add 0.1 ml of

mercaptoacetic acid, mix, make alkaline with
10 M ammonia and add sufficient water to
produce 20 ml. No pink colour is produced.
Anisaldehyde Sulphuric Acid Reagents - Mix

in the following order 0.5 ml of anisaldehyde, 10
ml of glacial acetic acid, 85 ml of methanol and 5
ml of sulphuric acid.
Ether - C4H10O = 74.12 (60-29-7)
Bismuth nitrate - Analytical reagent grade
Bromine Br2 = 159.8 (7726-95-6).
A volatile, highly flammable, colourless liquid;

boiling point, 340 to 350; d20
20 0.7 13 to 0.7 15. Do
not distil unless the ether complies with the
following test for peroxides.

A heavy, brownish-red, fuming liquid, highly
corrosive to the skin; d20
20 about 3.1.
Peroxides: Place 8 ml of potassium iodide and

starch solution in a 12 ml ground-glass
stoppered cylinder about 1.5 cm in diameter.
Fill completely with the reagent being
To prepare 0.05 M bromine dissolve 3 g of

potassium bromate and 15 g of potassium
bromide in sufficient water to produce 1000
ml. Weaker solutions should be prepared using
141
examined, shake vigorously and allow to stand

in the dark for 30 min. No colour is produced.
Strength
per cent
v/v
90
85
80
70
65
60
50
45
25
20
10
Store protected from light at a temperature not

exceeding 150. The name and concentration of
any added stabiliser are stated on the label.
1,4-Dioxane - 1,4-Dioxan; Diethylene Dioxide:
C4H8O2 = 88.11
Colourless liquid with an ethereal odour; bp,
about 1010; wt. per ml, about 1.03 g. Do not
distil unless the dioxan complies with the test
for peroxides.
Peroxides: Place 8 ml of starch iodide solution
in a 12 ml glass-stopperred cylinder about 1.5
cm in diameter. Fill completely with the
reagent under examination, shake vigorously
and allow to stand protected from light for 30
min; no colour is produced.
Volume of Ethanol
(96 per cent)
(Approx.) ml
934
885
831
727
676
623
519
468
259
207
104
0.83
0.85
0.86
0.89
0.90
0.91
0.93
0.94
0.97
0.975
0.986
Ethyl Acetate - C4H8O2 = 88.1 (14 1-78-6)

A colourless liquid with a fruity odour; boiling
point, about 760 to 780; d20
20 0.90 1 to 0.904
Dragendorffs Reagent
Solution B - A solution is made of 8 g

potassium iodide in 20 ml water.
Folin Ciocalteu Reagent - Dilute commercially

available Folin-Ciocalteu reagent (2N) with an
equal volume of distilled water. Transfer it in a
brown bottle and store in a refrigerator (40). It
should be golden in colour. Do not use it if it turns
olive green.
Stock solution - Equal volumes of solution A

and B are mixed (Can be stored for a long time
in dark glasses vessels)
Phosphomolybdotungstic Reagent (Folins

reagent) Folin Ciocalteau phenol reagent of
commerce.
Spray reagent - 1ml Stock solution is mixed

with 2 ml glacial acetic acid and 10 ml water
before use.
Dissolve 100 g of sodium tungstate and 25 g of

sodium molybdate in 700 ml of water, add 100
ml of hydrochloric acid and 50 ml of
orthophosphoric acid and heat the mixture
under a reflux condenser for 10 hours. Add 150
g of lithium sulphate, 50 ml of water and 0.2 ml
of bromine and boil to remove excess bromine
(about 15 min), cool, dilute to 1000 ml with
water and filter. The reagent should be yellow
in colour. If it acquires a greenish tint, it is
unsatisfactory for use but may be regenerated
by boiling with 0.2 ml of bromine. Care must
be taken to remove excess bromine by boiling.
Solution A - 0.85 g Basic Bismuth nitrate is

dissolved in a mixture of 10 ml glacial acetic
acid and 40 ml water.
Ethanol (96 per cent) - Alcohol - C2H6O.

Analytical reagent grade ethanol of commerce
containing not less than 95.1 per cent v/v and
not more than 96.9 per cent v/v of C2H6O.
A colourless liquid; weight per ml, about 0.81 g
Diluted ethanols may be prepared by diluting
the volumes of ethanol (96 per cent) indicated
in the following table to 1000 ml with water.
Store at 20 to 80.
142
Weight
per ml (g)

containing not less than 84 per cent w/w of H3
PO4 and about 15.7 M in strength.
Formic Acid, Anhydrous - CH2O2 = 46.03

Analytical reagent grade formic acid of
commerce containing not less than 98.0 per
cent w/w of CH2O2.
A corrosive liquid; wt. per ml, about 1.75 g

Potassium Dihydrogen Orthophosphate Potassium dihydrogen phosphate; KH2PO4 =
136.1 (7778-77-0)
A colourless, corrosive liquid with a pungent

odour; d20
20 about 1.22
Assay: Weigh accurately a conical flask
containing 10 ml of water, quickly add about 1
ml of the reagent and weigh again. Add 50 ml
of water and titrate with 1M sodium hydroxide
vs using 0.5 ml of phenolphthalein solution as
indicator. Each ml of 1M sodium hydroxide
VS is equivalent to 46.03 mg of CH2O2.
Analytical reagent grade of commerce,

Colourless crystals
Potassium Iodide - KI = 166.0 (7681-11-0)
Analytical reagent grade of commerce, A
white, crystalline powder
Sodium Carbonate - Na2CO3,10H2O = 286.2
(6132-02-1)
Hydrochloric Acid - HCl = 36.46 (7647-01-0)

Where no molarity is indicated use analytical
reagent grade of commerce with a relative
density of about 1.18, containing not less than
35 per cent w/w and not more than 38 per cent
w/w of HCl and about 11.5 M in strength.

Melting point, greater than 3000.
Sodium Molybdate - Na2MoO4,2H2O = 242.0
(10 102-40-6)
A colourless, fuming liquid
Solutions of molarity x M should be prepared

by diluting 85x ml of hydrochloric acid to
1000 ml with water. Store in a container of
polyethylene or other non-reacting material at a
temperature not exceeding 300.
Sodium Tungstate - Na2WO4,2H2O = 329.9

(10213-10-2)
Lithium Sulphate - Li2SO4,H2O = 128.0 (10102-25-7)
When no molarity is indicated use analytical

reagent grade of commerce containing about
96 per cent w/w of sulphuric acid and about 18
M in strength; an oily, corrosive liquid; wt. per
ml, about 1.84 g.

Sulphuric Acid - H2SO4 = 98.08 (7664-93-9)

Methanol - Methyl alcohol; CH4O = 32.04 (67-56-1)
When solutions of molarity xM are required,

they should be prepared by carefully adding
54x ml of sulphuric acid to an equal volume of
water and diluting to 1000 ml with water.
A colourless liquid; boiling point, 640 to 650;

d20
20 0.79 1 to 0.793
When methanol is followed by a percentage
figure, an instruction to use methanol diluted
with water to produce the specified percentage
v/v of methanol is implied.
When sulphuric acid is followed by a

percentage figure, an instruction to add,
carefully, sulphuric acid to water to produce
the specified percentage v/v (or, if required,
w/w) proportion of sulphuric acid is implied.
Orthophosphoric Acid - Phosphoric acid;

H3PO4 = 98.00 (7664-38-2)
143
Methanolic Sulphuric Reagent
Vanillin- 4-Hydroxy-3 - methoxybenzaldehyde;

C8H8O3 = 152.2 (121-33-5)
Add dropwise 10 ml of sulphuric acid to 90 ml

of ice- cold methanol.
Sodium Sulphate, Anhydrous - Na2SO4 =

142.0 (7757-82- 6)
White to yellowish white, needles or crystalline

powder, with an odour of vanilla.

complying with the following test.
Melting point, about 810, determined without

previous drying
Loss on drying: When dried at 1300, loses not

more than 0.5 per cent of its weight.
Vanillin Sulphuric Acid Reagent

Dissolve 1g of vanillin in 90 ml of ethanol; add
drop wise 10 ml of sulphuric acid to ice- cold
ethanol.
Sodium Carbonate Solution

30 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in water
and make up to 100 ml.
Water HPLC Grade

Ultra-pure water
Tetrahydrofuran - Tetramethylene oxide;

C4H8O = 72.11 (109-99-9)
Water, Carbon Dioxide-free
Water, carbon dioxide-free: Water that has been

boiled vigorously for a few min and protected
from the atmosphere during cooling and storage
A clear, colourless, flammable liquid; boiling

point, about 660; d20
20 about 0.89
Do not distil unless it complies with the
following test:
Peroxides: Place 8 ml of potassium iodide and
starch solution in a ground-glass-stoppered
cylinder with a capacity of 12 ml and about 1.5
cm in diameter and add sufficient of the
substance being examined to fill the cylinder
completely, shake vigorously and allow to
stand for 30 min protected from light. No
colour is produced.
Tetrahydrofuran used in spectrophotometry
complies with the following additional
requirement.
Transmittance not less than 20 per cent at 255
nm, 80 per cent at 270 nm and 98 per cent at
310 nm determined using water in the
reference cell.
Toluene - Methylbenzene; C7H8 = 92.14 (108-88-3)
A colourless liquid with a characteristic odour;
wt. per ml, 0.865 to 0.870 g; boiling point,
about 1100
144
APPENDIX - 5
WEIGHTS AND MEASURES
5.1.
Metric Equivalents of Classical Weights and Measures
The following table of metric equivalents of weights and

measures, linear measures and measurement of time used in
Classical Unit
the Ayurvedic classics have been approved by the Ayurvedic
Pharmacopoeia committee in consultation with Indian Yavodara
Standards Institution.
Agula
I. WEIGHTS AND MEASURES
Classical Unit
Metric
Equivalent
1 Ratt or Guj
= 125 mg
8 Ratt or Guj
= 1 Ma
=1g
12 Maas
= 1 Kara (Tol)
= 12 g
2 Karas
= 1 ukti
= 24 g
2 ukti
= 1 Palam
= 48 g
2 Palas
= 1 Prasti
= 96 g
2 Prastis
= 1 Kuava
= 192 g
2 Kuavas
= 1 Mnik
= 384 g
2 Mniks
= 1 Prastha
= 768 g
4 Prasthas
= 1 haka
= 3 kg 72 g
4 hakas
= 1 Droa
= 12 kg 288 g
2 Droas
= 1 rpa
= 24 kg 576 g
2 rpas
=1 Dro (Vh)
= 49 kg 152 g
4 Dros
= 1 Khr
= 196 kg 608 g
100 Palas
= 1 Tul
= 4 kg 800 g
20 Tuls
= 1 Bhra
= 96 kg
In case of liquids, the metric equivalents would be the
corresponding litre and milliliter.
II. LINEAR MEASURES
Vitasti
Aratni
Hasta
Npahasta
(Rjahasta)
Vyma
Metric Equivalent
1/8 of 3/4"
3/4"
0.24 cm
1.95 cm
9"
10 1/2"
18"
22"
22.86 cm
41.91 cm
45.72 cm
55.88 cm
72"
182.88 cm
III. MEASUREMENT OF TIME

Unit
Equivalent (in
hours, min &
seconds)
2 Kaas
2 Lavas
3 Nimeas
1 Ghas
30 Khs
= 1 Lava
= 1 Nimea
= 1 Kh
20 Kals + 3
Khs
30 Muhrtas
15 Ahortras
2 Pakas
2 Msas
= 1 Muhrta
3 tus
2 Ayanas
5 Savatsara
1 Ahortra of Devas
1 Ahortra of Pitaras
145
Inches
= 1 Kal
= 1 Ahortra
= 1 Paka
= 1 Msa
= 1 tu
= 1 Ayana
= 1 Savatsara
= 1Yuga
= 4.66 seconds
= 24 min
= 2 min
20 seconds
= 48 min
= 24 hours
= 15 days
= 30 days/1 month
= 60 days/ Two
Months
= 6 Months
= 12 months/1 Year
= 5 Years
= 1 Year
= 1 Month
5.2.
Metric System
Measures of Mass (Weights)

1 Kilogram (Kg)
1 Gram (g)
1Milligram (mg)
1 Microgram (g)
is the mass of the International Prototype Kilogram

the 1000th part of 1 Kilogram
the 1000th part of 1 gramme
the 1000th part of 1 milligram
Measures of capacity (Volumes)

1 Litre (1) is the volume occupied at its temperature of maximum density by a quantity of water having
a mass of 1 Kilogram.
1 Millilitre (ml) is the 1000th part of 1 litre.
The accepted relation between the litre and the cubic centimetre is 1 litre -1000.027 cubic centimeters.
Relation of capacity of Weight (Metric)
One litre of water at 200 weighs 997.18 grams when weighed in air of density 0.0012 gram per millilitre against
brass weights of density 84 grams per millilitre.
Measures of Length
1 Metre (m) is the length of the International Prototype Metre at 0.
1 Centimetre (cm)
the 100th part of 1 metre
1 Millimetre (mm)
the 1000th part of 1 metre
the 1000th part of 1 millimetre

1 Micron ()
the 1000th part of micron
1 Milliimicron (m)
146

API-Pt-I, Vol-9

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

API-Pt-I, Vol-9

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

API-Pt-I, Vol-9

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the different units of measurement mentioned in Ayurvedic classics?

What are the different units of measurement mentioned in Ayurvedic classics?

What are the metric equivalents provided for classical weights and measures?

What are the metric equivalents provided for classical weights and measures?

THE

PHARMACOPOEIA COMMISSION FOR INDIAN MEDICINE &

PHARMACOPOEIA COMMISSION FOR INDIAN MEDICINE & HOMOEOPATHY

Pharmacopoeia Commission for Indian Medicine & Homoeopathy

Relative quantities of solvent

Less than 1 part.

PHARMACOPOEIA COMMISSION FOR INDIAN MEDICINE & HOMOEOPATHY

2. Dr. V. Arunachalam (Siddha Expert)

The Standing Finance Committee

The Scientific Body

M. Bhattacharya & Co. Pvt. Ltd.

Execution of Pharmacopoeial Work

Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia Committee

Dr. Malati Chauhan

Siddha Pharmacopoeia Committee

Unani Pharmacopoeia Committee

Dr. Rahul Singh

Homoeopathic Pharmacopoeia Committee

Director General: Dr. R. K. Manchanda

Dr. Rajeev Kr. Sharma

Dr. Madhira Bhawanishankar

Principal Scientific Officer- Dr. S. C. Verma; Scientific Officer- Dr. Anupam

Scientific Officer- Dr. Ramachandran S.

SPECIAL INTRODUCTION TO VOLUME IX

Phyto-chemical Reference Standards as Markers:

ABBREVIATIONS FOR TECHNICAL TERMS

INDO-ROMANIC EQUIVALENTS FOR DEVANGAR ALPHABETS

allak Water extract

3.5 Thin-Layer Chromatography (TLC)

API, Part-I, Vol.-IX (Extracts); Monographs

Fruit - Indehiscent, dry utricle enclosed within

Root - Mature root shows 3-8 layered, rectangular,

Seed - Sub-cylindric, truncate at the apex, round

Assamese: Chirchita; Bengali: Apamg; English:

Stem - Young stem shows 6-10 prominent ridges,

Stem - 0.3-0.5 cm in cut pieces, yellowish-brown, erect,

API, Part-I, Vol.-IX (Extracts); Monographs

Leaf - Petiole - Shows crescent-shaped outline,

Fig. 1: Powdered drug of APMRGA

Identity, Purity and Strength:

API, Part-I, Vol.-IX (Extracts); Monographs

Visible after derivatisation

residues: Complies with the prescribed limits,

API, Part-I, Vol.-IX (Extracts); Monographs

Constituents: Oleanolic acid glycosides;

Properties and Action: Rasa: Kau, Tikta;

Fig. 3: HPLC chromatogram of Apmrga

Gua: Sara, Tka; Vrya: Ua; Vipka: Kau;

Storage: Store in well closed container protected

Important formulations: Abhy lavaa,

Labelling: The label states the official name,

API reference standard:

Dose: Cra (powder): 3-6 g

API Oleanolic acid RS

API, Part-I, Vol.-IX (Extracts); Monographs